Yamaha | TSR-7850 | Owner's Manual | Yamaha TSR-7850 Owner's Manual

Yamaha TSR-7850 Owner's Manual
AV Receiver
Owner's Manual
• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.
• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.
• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.
EN
CONTENTS
BEFORE USING THE UNIT
8
3
Connecting playback devices.......................................................... 31
HDMI connection with a video device such as a BD/DVD player......................................................................... 31
How to use this manual............................................................................ 8
Connection other than HDMI with a playback device............................................................................................. 31
How to use this manual......................................................................................................................................................... 8
Connecting to the jack on the front panel................................................................................................................... 33
4
Checking the accessories.......................................................................... 8
Connecting the radio antennas....................................................... 34
Checking the accessories...................................................................................................................................................... 8
Connecting the FM/AM antennas (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models)........................ 34
Using the remote control......................................................................... 9
Connecting the DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models)............................................. 35
5
Insert the batteries in the remote control....................................................................................................................... 9
Operating range of the remote control........................................................................................................................... 9
FEATURES
Preparing for connecting to a network........................................... 36
Preparing for connecting to a network......................................................................................................................... 36
Connecting a network cable (wired connection)...................................................................................................... 36
10
Preparing wireless antennas (wireless connection).................................................................................................. 37
6
What you can do with the unit............................................................... 10
Connecting other devices................................................................ 37
Connecting an external power amplifier...................................................................................................................... 37
Part names and functions...................................................................... 12
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function.................................................................................. 38
7
Part names and functions of the front panel............................................................................................................... 12
Part names and functions of the front display............................................................................................................ 14
Plugging in the power cable............................................................ 39
Plugging in the power cable............................................................................................................................................. 39
Part names and functions of the rear panel................................................................................................................. 15
8
Part names and functions of the remote control....................................................................................................... 16
Selecting the on-screen menu language........................................ 40
Selecting the on-screen menu language...................................................................................................................... 40
PREPARATIONS
1
17
9
Connecting speakers........................................................................ 17
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO).......................................................................................... 42
Names and functions of speakers.................................................................................................................................... 17
Checking the YPAO measurement results.................................................................................................................... 44
Speaker systems and speakers to be connected....................................................................................................... 18
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments................................................................................................................. 45
Speaker requirements.......................................................................................................................................................... 18
Error messages from YPAO................................................................................................................................................ 46
Setting the speaker impedance....................................................................................................................................... 19
Warning messages from YPAO......................................................................................................................................... 47
Cable requirements.............................................................................................................................................................. 19
10 Setting MusicCast............................................................................. 48
How to connect speakers................................................................................................................................................... 19
What is MusicCast.................................................................................................................................................................. 48
How to place speakers (speaker systems).................................................................................................................... 21
Using MusicCast CONTROLLER......................................................................................................................................... 48
Advanced speaker systems................................................................................................................................................ 27
2
Configuring the necessary speaker settings.................................. 41
Assigning speaker configuration..................................................................................................................................... 41
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network.................................................................................................................. 48
Connecting a TV................................................................................ 30
HDMI connection with a TV............................................................................................................................................... 30
HDMI connection with another TV or a projector..................................................................................................... 30
2
En
ENJOYING SOUND
49
Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia and
Australia models).................................................................................... 64
Enjoying sound field effects.................................................................. 49
Setting the frequency steps............................................................................................................................................... 64
Select your favorite sound mode..................................................................................................................................... 49
Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................................... 65
Enjoying 3D sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)................................................................................................................ 49
Selecting a preset station................................................................................................................................................... 66
Enjoying sound field effects optimized for the type of content........................................................................... 50
Registering FM radio stations automatically (FM Auto Preset)............................................................................. 66
Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)............................................ 50
Registering a radio station manually.............................................................................................................................. 67
Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).................................... 50
Clearing preset stations....................................................................................................................................................... 68
Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)............................................................................ 50
Clearing all preset stations................................................................................................................................................. 68
Enjoying unprocessed playback............................................................ 51
Enjoying original sound (straight decode)................................................................................................................... 51
Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models)
.................................................................................................................. 69
Enjoying multichannel playback without sound field effects (surround decoder)....................................... 51
Preparing the DAB tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 69
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)......................................................................................................... 52
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................................. 70
Enjoying enhanced bass sound............................................................. 53
Selecting a preset DAB radio station.............................................................................................................................. 70
Registering a DAB radio station as presets................................................................................................................... 71
Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)....................................................................................................................................... 53
Clearing preset DAB radio stations................................................................................................................................. 72
Enjoying enhanced compressed music................................................. 53
Clearing all preset DAB radio stations............................................................................................................................ 72
Playing back digitally compressed formats with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)......... 53
Displaying the DAB information...................................................................................................................................... 73
Enjoying Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™..................................................... 54
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label....................................................................................... 74
Enjoying Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™.............................................................................................................................. 54
Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models)
.................................................................................................................. 75
Enjoying music in multiple rooms......................................................... 55
Playing back music in multiple rooms........................................................................................................................... 55
Selecting a frequency for FM radio reception............................................................................................................. 75
Connecting Zone2 speakers.............................................................................................................................................. 55
Selecting a preset FM radio station................................................................................................................................. 76
Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection).............................................................................................. 57
Registering FM radio stations automatically (FM Auto Preset)............................................................................. 76
Controlling Zone2................................................................................................................................................................. 58
Registering an FM radio station manually.................................................................................................................... 77
Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode)................................................................................... 59
Clearing preset FM radio stations.................................................................................................................................... 78
PLAYBACK
Clearing all preset FM radio stations.............................................................................................................................. 78
60
Displaying the Radio Data System information......................................................................................................... 79
Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device.............................. 80
Basic playback procedure...................................................................... 60
Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit........................................................................................................... 80
Basic procedure for playing back video and music................................................................................................... 60
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/headphones....................................................................................... 81
Selecting an HDMI output jack......................................................................................................................................... 61
Playing back music with AirPlay............................................................ 82
Switching information on the front display................................................................................................................. 61
Playback of iTunes/iPhone music contents with AirPlay........................................................................................ 82
Item names and functions of the playback screen.................................................................................................... 62
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device............................ 83
Item names and functions of the browse screen....................................................................................................... 63
Playback of USB storage device contents..................................................................................................................... 83
3
En
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)...................... 84
Configuring the speaker settings........................................................ 109
Media sharing setup on media servers (PCs/NAS)..................................................................................................... 84
Setting your speaker system........................................................................................................................................... 109
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)......................................................................................... 84
Setting the size of the front speakers.......................................................................................................................... 109
Setting the use of a center speaker and its size....................................................................................................... 110
Listening to Internet radio..................................................................... 86
Setting the use of surround speakers and their size.............................................................................................. 110
Selecting an Internet radio station.................................................................................................................................. 86
Setting the layout of the surround speakers............................................................................................................. 111
Registering favorite Internet radio stations................................................................................................................. 86
Setting the use of surround back speakers and their size.................................................................................... 111
Listening to music streaming services.................................................. 87
Setting the use of presence speakers and their size.............................................................................................. 112
Listening to a streaming service...................................................................................................................................... 87
Setting the layout of the presence speakers............................................................................................................. 112
Useful playback functions...................................................................... 88
Setting the crossover frequency of the low-frequency components.............................................................. 112
SCENE function....................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Setting the use of a subwoofer...................................................................................................................................... 113
Shortcut function................................................................................................................................................................... 91
Setting the phase of the subwoofer............................................................................................................................. 113
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu)......................................................................................... 93
Setting the distance between each speaker and the listening position......................................................... 113
Adjusting the volume of each speaker........................................................................................................................ 113
Setting the equalizer.......................................................................................................................................................... 114
Basic operation of the Option menu.............................................................................................................................. 93
Outputting test tones........................................................................................................................................................ 115
Option menu items............................................................................................................................................................... 94
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments.............................................................................................................. 115
Adjusting the tone of the audio output........................................................................................................................ 95
Configuring the volume automatically based on the YPAO measurement results...................................... 95
Adjusting the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds............................................................................. 96
Adjusting the delay of the Lipsync function................................................................................................................ 97
Setting Compressed Music Enhancer............................................................................................................................ 97
Correcting volume differences during playback........................................................................................................ 98
Setting the use of Extra Bass.............................................................................................................................................. 98
Enabling the video signal processing............................................................................................................................ 99
Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source............................................................ 99
Configuring the shuffle/repeat setting.......................................................................................................................... 99
Switching between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.................................................................... 100
Setting presets for radio stations.................................................................................................................................. 100
Adding an Internet radio station to the “Favorites” folder.................................................................................. 102
Removing an Internet radio station from the “Favorites” folder....................................................................... 102
Performing an initial scan for DAB radio reception................................................................................................ 102
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label..................................................................................... 103
Checking the current status information................................................................................................................... 103
CONFIGURATIONS
104
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)..................................... 104
Basic operation of the Setup menu.............................................................................................................................. 104
Setup menu items............................................................................................................................................................... 105
4
En
Configuring the sound settings........................................................... 116
Configuring the video/HDMI settings................................................. 128
Checking the current audio signal information....................................................................................................... 116
Checking the current video and HDMI signal information.................................................................................. 128
Enabling Lipsync adjustment......................................................................................................................................... 116
Setting the use of the video signal processing........................................................................................................ 128
Setting the adjustment method of the Lipsync function..................................................................................... 117
Setting a resolution to output HDMI video signals................................................................................................ 128
Adjusting the delay of the Lipsync function............................................................................................................. 117
Setting an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals........................................................................................... 129
Selecting sound programs............................................................................................................................................... 118
Setting the use of HDMI Control.................................................................................................................................... 129
Adjusting the sound field effect level.......................................................................................................................... 119
Setting the audio jack used for TV audio input........................................................................................................ 129
Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation............................. 119
Setting the use of ARC....................................................................................................................................................... 129
Adjusting the broadening effect of the presence sound field........................................................................... 119
Linking the standby modes of the unit and the TV................................................................................................ 130
Adjusting the loss of the presence sound field........................................................................................................ 120
Setting the output of HDMI audio from the TV speaker....................................................................................... 130
Adjusting the decay time of the rear reverberant sound..................................................................................... 120
Setting the version of HDCP used on the HDMI input jacks................................................................................ 130
Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation................................. 120
Setting the use of HDMI Standby Through................................................................................................................ 130
Adjusting the volume of the reverberant sound..................................................................................................... 120
Configuring the network settings....................................................... 131
Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation............................ 121
Checking the network information on the unit....................................................................................................... 131
Adjusting the broadening effect of the surround sound field........................................................................... 121
Setting the network connection method (Wired/Wireless)................................................................................ 131
Adjusting the loss of the surround sound field........................................................................................................ 121
Setting the network parameters automatically (DHCP)........................................................................................ 131
Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.................. 121
Setting the network parameters manually................................................................................................................ 132
Adjusting the broadening effect of the surround back sound field................................................................. 122
Setting the use of the Network Standby function.................................................................................................. 132
Adjusting the loss of the surround back sound field............................................................................................. 122
Setting the MAC address filter........................................................................................................................................ 133
Selecting the surround decoder used in the program.......................................................................................... 122
Setting the MAC address.................................................................................................................................................. 133
Setting the use of Center Spread.................................................................................................................................. 123
Setting the use of a Digital Media Controller............................................................................................................ 133
Adjusting the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field........................................... 123
Setting the use of volume control via AirPlay........................................................................................................... 133
Adjusting the entire volume for “7ch Stereo”........................................................................................................... 123
Setting the network name of the unit......................................................................................................................... 134
Adjusting the front and rear volume balance for “7ch Stereo”.......................................................................... 123
Setting the power interlock from the unit to MusicCast compatible devices.............................................. 134
Adjusting the left and right volume balance for “7ch Stereo”............................................................................ 123
Configuring the Bluetooth® settings.................................................. 135
Adjusting the height volume balance using the presence speakers for “7ch Stereo”............................... 124
Setting the use of Bluetooth®......................................................................................................................................... 135
Setting the use of Monaural Mix for “7ch Stereo”................................................................................................... 124
Terminating the connection between a Bluetooth® device and the unit...................................................... 135
Setting the dynamic range adjustment method..................................................................................................... 124
Setting the use of the Bluetooth® Standby function.............................................................................................. 135
Setting the limit value of the volume.......................................................................................................................... 124
Setting the use of audio transmission to a Bluetooth® device........................................................................... 136
Setting the initial volume for when the unit is turned on.................................................................................... 125
Connecting the unit to a Bluetooth® device that receives transmitted audio............................................. 136
Adjusting the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level automatically.................................................................................... 125
Setting Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)......................................................................................................... 125
Configuring the scene settings............................................................ 126
Selecting items to be included as the scene assignments................................................................................... 126
Renaming the SCENE name............................................................................................................................................. 127
5
En
Configuring the multi zone settings................................................... 137
Configuring the advanced settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)....... 150
Checking the Zone2 information.................................................................................................................................. 137
Basic operation of the ADVANCED SETUP menu..................................................................................................... 150
Setting the use of volume adjustments for Zone2 output.................................................................................. 137
ADVANCED SETUP menu items..................................................................................................................................... 150
Setting the Zone2 limit value of the volume............................................................................................................ 137
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.).............................................................................................. 151
Setting the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on...................................................................... 138
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID).......................................................................................................... 151
Adjusting the time deviation in relation to the main zone.................................................................................. 138
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)............................................................................................ 151
Switching between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.............................................................................. 138
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)......................................................................................................... 151
Setting the use of Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output.................................................................. 139
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK)............................................................................. 152
Adjusting the tone for Zone2 output.......................................................................................................................... 139
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE).................................................................................................... 152
Setting the use of Extra Bass for Zone2 output........................................................................................................ 139
Setting DTS Format Notification (DTS MODE).......................................................................................................... 153
Adjusting the volume balance for Zone2 output.................................................................................................... 139
Backuping and restoring all the settings (BKUP/RSTR)......................................................................................... 153
Renaming the zone name................................................................................................................................................ 140
Restoring the default settings (INIT)............................................................................................................................. 154
Setting the use of switching to the party mode on Zone2.................................................................................. 140
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)................................................................................................................................. 154
Configuring the system settings......................................................... 141
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)................................................................................................................. 154
Checking the system information on the unit.......................................................................................................... 141
TROUBLESHOOTING
Setting the on-screen menu language....................................................................................................................... 141
Combining audio of another input source with video of the current input source................................... 142
155
Setting input sources to be skipped when operating the INPUT key.............................................................. 143
When any problem appears................................................................. 155
Automatically changing the input source names displayed on the front display...................................... 144
If trouble occurs, first check the following:................................................................................................................ 155
Manually changing the input source names displayed on the front display................................................ 144
Power, system, or remote control trouble................................................................................................................. 155
Setting the use of Auto Play function.......................................................................................................................... 145
Audio trouble....................................................................................................................................................................... 157
Setting sound programs to skip when operating the PROGRAM key............................................................. 145
Video trouble........................................................................................................................................................................ 160
Setting the function for the PROGRAM key on the remote control................................................................. 145
FM/AM radio trouble (AM radio feature is not available for the U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia
models)................................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Setting the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control.................. 146
DAB radio trouble (U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models).......................................................................... 162
Adjusting the brightness of the front display........................................................................................................... 146
USB trouble........................................................................................................................................................................... 163
Setting the scale of the volume display...................................................................................................................... 146
Network trouble.................................................................................................................................................................. 163
Setting the use of short messages on the TV............................................................................................................ 146
Bluetooth® trouble.............................................................................................................................................................. 165
Setting the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV........................................................................................... 146
Specifying the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function....................................................................... 147
Error indications on the front display................................................. 167
Specifying the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input..................................... 147
Error indications on the front display.......................................................................................................................... 167
Switching the output level for electronic signal transmission manually........................................................ 147
APPENDIX
Specifying the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized................................ 147
Setting the amount of time for the auto-standby function................................................................................. 148
169
Setting the use of the eco mode................................................................................................................................... 148
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network................................... 169
Preventing accidental changes to the settings........................................................................................................ 148
Firmware updates............................................................................................................................................................... 169
Updating the firmware via the network..................................................................................................................... 149
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network......................................................................................................... 170
Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast Surround function)
................................................................................................................ 171
Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast Surround function)................................................................... 171
6
En
Connecting to a network wirelessly.................................................... 173
Default settings.................................................................................... 198
Selecting a wireless network connection method.................................................................................................. 173
Default settings of the Option menu........................................................................................................................... 198
Setting up a wireless connection using the WPS button..................................................................................... 174
Default settings of the Setup menu............................................................................................................................. 198
Setting up a wireless connection using an iOS device.......................................................................................... 174
Default settings of the ADVANCED SETUP menu.................................................................................................... 200
Setting up a wireless connection by selecting from the list of available access points............................ 176
Setting up a wireless connection manually............................................................................................................... 177
Setting up a wireless connection by using the WPS PIN code........................................................................... 179
Input/output jacks and cables............................................................. 180
Video/audio jacks................................................................................................................................................................ 180
Video jacks............................................................................................................................................................................. 180
Audio jacks............................................................................................................................................................................ 181
Using presence speakers...................................................................... 182
Presence speaker layout................................................................................................................................................... 182
Installing the presence speakers in Front Height position.................................................................................. 182
Installing the presence speakers in Overhead position........................................................................................ 182
Using Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.................................................................................... 183
Glossary................................................................................................. 184
Glossary of audio information........................................................................................................................................ 184
Glossary of HDMI and video information................................................................................................................... 185
Glossary of network information................................................................................................................................... 186
Glossary of Yamaha technologies................................................................................................................................. 186
Supported devices and file formats.................................................... 187
Supported Bluetooth® devices....................................................................................................................................... 187
Supported USB devices..................................................................................................................................................... 187
Supported AirPlay devices............................................................................................................................................... 187
Supported file formats...................................................................................................................................................... 188
Video signal flow.................................................................................. 188
Video signal flow................................................................................................................................................................. 188
Video conversion table..................................................................................................................................................... 189
Additional information on HDMI......................................................... 190
HDMI Control and synchronized operations............................................................................................................ 190
Audio Return Channel (ARC)........................................................................................................................................... 191
HDMI signal compatibility............................................................................................................................................... 192
Trademarks........................................................................................... 193
Trademarks............................................................................................................................................................................ 193
Specifications........................................................................................ 194
Specifications........................................................................................................................................................................ 194
7
En
BEFORE USING THE UNIT
How to use this manual
Checking the accessories
How to use this manual
Checking the accessories
When reading this manual, mind the following items.
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless
otherwise specified.
£ AM antenna (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia £ FM antenna (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia
and Australia models)
and Australia models)
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to
change without notice.
• This manual mainly explains operations using the menu displayed on the TV screen.
Operations with the TV screen menu are only available when your TV is connected
to the unit via HDMI.
* One of the above is supplied depending on
the region of purchase.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPhone”.
“iPhone” refers to “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
£ DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Russia and
Australia models)
£ YPAO microphone
£ Power cable
£ Remote control
WARNING:
Indicates precautions for the possibility of death or serious injury.
CAUTION:
Indicates precautions for the possibility of minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE:
£ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
Indicates precautions for use to avoid the possibility of malfunction/damage to the unit.
£ Quick Start Guide
NOTE:
Indicates instructions and supplementary explanations for optimum use.
* The supplied power cable varies depending
on the region of purchase.
NOTE
Access the Yamaha Downloads site to download the latest Owner's Manual and Quick Start Guide.
http://download.yamaha.com/
8
En
Using the remote control
Insert the batteries in the remote control
Insert the batteries the right way round.
Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown in the following figure.
Within 6 m (20 ft)
30°
30°
9
En
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Supporting 2- to 7.1-channel
speaker system
Enjoying sound field effects with
much presence
Wide variety of supported
content via network
According to the number of speakers that you are
using, you can enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in
various styles.
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs
and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy
playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such
as sound field effect or stereo playback).
When the unit is connected to a network, you can enjoy
the various kinds of content via network on the unit.
• “Enjoying 3D sound fields (CINEMA DSP
3D)” (p.49)
• “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/
NAS)” (p.84)
• “Using 7.1/5.1.2-channel system” (p.21)
• “Using 5.1.2-channel system” (p.22)
• “Using 7.1-channel system” (p.23)
• “Using 5.1-channel system” (p.24)
• “Using 3.1.2-channel system” (p.25)
• “Using Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.26)
• “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.55)
Automatically optimizing the
speaker settings (YPAO)
YPAO function detects speaker connections, measures
the distances from them to your listening positions by
using YPAO microphone measurement, and then
automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as
volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your
room (YPAO: Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic
Optimizer).
• “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically
(YPAO)” (p.42)
• “Enjoying sound field effects optimized for the type of
content” (p.50)
• “Enjoying sound field effects without surround
speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.50)
• “Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT
CINEMA)” (p.50)
• “Enjoying original sound (straight decode)” (p.51)
• “Enjoying multichannel playback without sound field
effects (surround decoder)” (p.51)
• “Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure
Direct)” (p.52)
• “Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)” (p.53)
• “Playback of iTunes/iPhone music contents with
AirPlay” (p.82)
• “Selecting an Internet radio station” (p.86)
• “Listening to a streaming service” (p.87)
Playing back content of various
devices
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
Bluetooth devices (such as smartphones), game
consoles, USB storage devices, and other devices. You
can play back content of them.
• “Playing back digitally compressed formats with
enriched sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)” (p.53)
• “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.65)
• “Enjoying Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™” (p.54)
• “Playback of USB storage device contents” (p.83)
10
En
• “Playback Bluetooth® device music on the
unit” (p.80)
Useful functions
The unit is equipped with the various useful functions.
The SCENE function allows you to select the input
source and settings registered to the corresponding
scene, such as sound program and Compressed
Music Enhancer on/off, with just one touch. When the
unit is connected to an HDMI Control-compatible TV
with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations.
• “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with
one touch (SCENE)” (p.88)
• “Registering a favorite content as shortcut” (p.91)
• “HDMI Control and synchronized
operations” (p.190)
• “Audio Return Channel (ARC)” (p.191)
Additional Features
The unit is equipped with the function connected with
speakers wirelessly. You can enjoy audio played back
on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Also, using devices that support the MusicCast
Surround function, the surround speakers and
subwoofer can be wireless.
• “Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/
headphones” (p.81)
Useful applications
Application: “AV SETUP GUIDE”
AV SETUP GUIDE is an application that assists
you with cable connections between AV Receiver
and playback devices as well as AV Receiver
setup. This app guides you through the various
settings such as speaker connections, TV and
playback device connections and selecting the
speaker system.
For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App
Store or Google Play.
Application: “AV CONTROLLER”
AV CONTROLLER is an application that assists
you with various operations of AV Receiver
without the remote control. This app allows you
not only to control the unit’s power and volume
but also to select the input source and start/stop
playback.
For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App
Store or Google Play.
• “Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast
Surround function)” (p.171)
11
En
Application: "MusicCast
CONTROLLER"
MusicCast CONTROLLER is an application that
allows you to link a MusicCast compatible device
to other MusicCast compatible devices in other
rooms and play them back simultaneously. This
app lets you use your smartphone or other mobile
device instead of the remote control to easily
select music to play back as well as configure the
unit and MusicCast compatible devices.
For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on
the App Store or Google Play.
Part names and functions
Part names and functions of the front panel
The part names and functions of the front panel are as follows.
a
b
c
d e f
g
k
h i j
MAIN ZONE
l
PURE DIRECT
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
INFO (WPS)
MEMORY
PRESET
INPUT
FM
1
PHONES
YPAO MIC
TONE CONTROL
2
TUNING
VOLUME
3
PROGRAM
n
4
STRAIGHT
(CONNECT)
SILENT CINEMA
m
AM
SCENE
o
pq r
s
USB
5V
1A
t
AUX
AUDIO
u
v
(U.S.A. model)
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of
the following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.129)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.130)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.132)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.135)
3 ZONE 2 key
Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.58).
4 ZONE CONTROL key
Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is
controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel
(p.58).
5 INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display
(p.61).
Enters the wireless LAN connection setup (WPS button
configuration) by holding down for a few seconds (p.174).
6 MEMORY key
Registers radio stations as preset stations (p.66).
Registers Bluetooth, USB, or network content as a shortcut
by holding down for a few seconds (p.91).
8 FM and AM keys (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia and
Australia models)
FM and DAB keys (U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia
models)
Switch between FM and AM (p.65) or FM and DAB
(p.70).
9 Front display
Displays information (p.14).
: TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.65).
7 PRESET keys
Select a preset radio station (p.66).
A Remote control sensor
Recall Bluetooth, USB, or network content that is registered
as a shortcut (p.92).
B PURE DIRECT key
Receives remote control signals (p.9).
Enables/disables the Pure Direct (p.52).
12
En
C INPUT knob
Select an input source.
D PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
E YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.42).
F TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and lowfrequency range (Bass) individually (p.95).
G SCENE keys
Switch with one touch between multiple settings set using
the SCENE function. Also, turns on the unit when it is in
standby mode (p.88).
H PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.49).
I STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.51).
Enters the MusicCast network addition and the wireless
LAN setup by holding down for 5 seconds (p.48).
J USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.83).
K AUX jack
For connecting devices, such as portable audio players
(p.33).
L VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
13
En
Part names and functions of the front display
The part names and functions of the front display are as follows.
2
1
34
6
8 9 0
7
A
B
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A - DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
5
2
ECO
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
C
E
D
1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an
HDMI signal.
A Volume indicator
3 Firmware update indicator
Lights up when a firmware update is available via the
network.
4 Bluetooth indicator
Light up while the unit is connected to a Bluetooth device.
5 CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.49) is working.
6 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
7 STEREO
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.96) is working.
D
I
J
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.53) is
working.
H YPAO VOL.
Lights up when YPAO Volume (p.95) is enabled.
I Speaker indicators
Indicates the current volume.
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
B VIRTUAL
Lights up when the virtual processing is working (p.49) .
C ECO
Lights up when the eco mode (p.148) is enabled.
D Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently
operational.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
E Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.61).
F Wireless LAN indicator
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio
signal.
Light up while the unit is connected to a wireless network
(p.173).
TUNED
NOTE
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
This indicator may light up when the unit is added to the
MusicCast network. For details, see “Adding the unit to the
MusicCast network” (p.48).
8 PARTY
H
G ENHANCER
Lights up when audio output to Zone2 (p.58) is enabled.
: A-DRC
Lights up when the unit is the master device of the
MusicCast network.
G
9 ZONE2
OUT1/OUT2
2 LINK MASTER
F
Lights up when the party mode (p.59) is enabled.
14
En
B Presence speaker (L)
N Presence speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
J MUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.
Part names and functions of the rear panel
The part names and functions of the rear panel are as follows.
a b
f
e
cd
g
c
h
i
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
HDMI ( HDCP2.2 )
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
NETWORK
(4 NET RADIO)
(8 SERVER)
2
1
OUT
1
ARC
2
(1 MOVIE)
3
(5 STB)
4
5
(6 GAME)
AC IN
REMOTE
ANTENNA
AUDIO 1
( 2 RADIO )
( 7 TV )
FM
OPTICAL
AM
AUDIO 2
( 3 MUSIC )
OPTICAL
SPEAKERS
AUDIO 3
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
COAXIAL
Y
PHONO
PR
PB
AUDIO 4
AUDIO 5
VIDEO
SURROUND
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
CENTER
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
FRONT
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
1
GND
2
jk
l m n
o
(U.S.A. model)
▪ The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white
on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
5 HDMI 1–5 jacks
A PHONO jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.31).
6 ANTENNA jacks
1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from
another room (p.57).
2 TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting to a device that supports the trigger
function (p.38).
3 Wireless antennas
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.173) and
a Bluetooth connection (p.80).
4 HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting
video/audio signals (p.30). When using ARC, TV audio
signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
For connecting to the radio antennas (p.34).
For connecting to a turntable (p.32).
B ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.57).
C PRE OUT jacks
7 NETWORK jack
For a wired connection to a network (p.36).
For connecting to an external power amplifier (p.37).
D SUBWOOFER jack
8 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Central and South America model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.39).
9 AC IN jack
For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
(p.20).
E SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.17).
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.39).
: AV jacks
AUDIO jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.32).
15
En
Part names and functions of the remote control
The part names and functions of the supplied remote control are as follows.
a
b
c
d
e
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
MAIN
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
o
p
SCENE
f
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
h
USB
5 PARTY key
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
Turns on/off the party mode (p.59).
Switch with one touch between multiple settings set using
the SCENE function. Also, turn on the unit when it is in
standby mode (p.88).
7 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
/MENU
NOTE
Presses NET repeatedly to select a desired network source.
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
r
BASS
s
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
In the on-screen menu, the description of a term in the
cursor position appears on the TV. This key is enabled
when the “?” icon is displayed on the on-screen menu.
C Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.49).
D Playback operation keys
Controls playback of the external device.
E HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.61).
F PURE DIRECT key
6 SCENE keys
q
n
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
3 MAIN/ZONE 2 switch
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min,
90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to
the standby mode.
BLUETOOTH
k
m
B HELP key
4 SLEEP key
i
j
l
Operates the menu.
2 z (receiver power) key
Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control
(p.58).
INPUT
g
A ENTER/Cursor, RETURN keys
8ADGHI External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET”
is selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device.
NOTE
The playback devices must support HDMI Control. Some HDMI
Control-compatible devices cannot be used.
8 PRESET keys
Select a preset radio station (p.66).
Recall Bluetooth, USB, or network content that is registered
as a shortcut (p.92).
9 OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.93).
: SETUP key
Displays the setup menu (p.104).
16
En
Enables/disables the Pure Direct (p.52).
H VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
I MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
PREPARATIONS
1 Connecting speakers
Names and functions of speakers
Speaker type
Front (L/R)
The names and functions of speakers connected to the unit are as follows.
E
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1
1.8 m (5.9 ft)
9
Center
R
2
3
Produce surround channel sounds. Surround speakers
also produce surround back channel sounds when no
surround back speakers are connected.
Surround back (L/R)
6/7
Produce surround back channel sounds.
Presence (L/R)
E/R
Produce CINEMA DSP 3D effect sounds or heights
channel sounds of Dolby Atmos and DTS:X contents.
▪ Front Height
▪ Overhead
10° to 30°
6
4/5
9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and
reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers. You can choose a layout pattern that suits
your listening environment.
5
10° to 30°
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue
and vocals).
NOTE
9
4
3
Function
Produce front channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Surround (L/R)
Subwoofer
1.8 m (5.9 ft)
Abbr.
1/2
▪ Dolby Enabled SP
7
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
NOTE
Use this diagram as a reference for the ideal speaker layout for the unit. Your speaker layout does not need
to match the diagram exactly, since the YPAO function can be used to automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the actual speaker layout.
17
En
Speaker systems and speakers to be connected
Speaker requirements
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the
speakers and subwoofer in your room.
Speakers and subwoofers to be connected to the unit must meet the following
requirements:
Speaker type
7.1/5.1.2
5.1
2.1
Front (L/R) 1/2



Center 3



*3
Surround (L/R) 4/5
• Use a subwoofer with built-in amplifier.
NOTE
▪ Prepare the number of speakers according to your speaker system.
Surround back (L/R) 6/7
*1
Presence (L/R) E/R
*2
*4


Subwoofer 9
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When
connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. For
details, see the following:
– “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.19)
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
▪ Be sure to connect the front left and right speakers.

If you have nine speakers, you can use the both surround back speakers and
presence speakers. In this case, the unit automatically changes the speakers to be
used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP.
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or
presence speakers (*2).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or presence
speakers (*4).
NOTE
▪ “5.1.2-channel” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker channels”.
▪ When using surround back speakers, be sure to connect the surround back left and right speakers. Using
only one surround back speaker was discontinued.
▪ You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
18
En
Setting the speaker impedance
How to connect speakers
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting
6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”.
n Connecting the speaker
1
2
Connect a speaker cable between the negative (–) terminal of the unit and the
negative (–) terminal of the speaker, and between the positive (+) terminal of the unit
and the positive (+) unit of the speaker.
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC
wall outlet.
NOTICE
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN
ZONE z.
When connecting the speaker cables, take notice of the following:
▪ Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire strands into
the unit's interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.
z (MAIN ZONE)
▪ Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause a short circuit and also damage the unit or the
speakers.
– Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.
STRAIGHT
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
OUT
2
ECO
SP IMP.••8¬MIN
4
5
– Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove
the power cable from the AC wall outlet.
– Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit’s metal parts (rear panel
and screws).
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
Cable requirements
Use the following types of commercially-available cables to connect speakers to the
unit:
Speaker cables (the number of speakers
required)
+
–
Audio pin cable (for connecting a subwoofer)
+
–
19
En
NOTE
n Connecting the subwoofer
▪ Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet before connecting the speakers.
▪ Be sure to connect the front left and right speakers.
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
▪ Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers,
set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. For details, see the following:
NOTE
Unplug the power cables of the unit and subwoofer from the AC wall outlets before connecting the
subwoofer.
– “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.19)
1
2
3
4
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of
the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly
together.
ZONE OU
ZONE
Audio pin cable
Tighten the terminal.
c
FR
ON
T
d
a
- (black)
This completes the connection.
NOTE
▪ If “Check SP Wires” appears on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and then
confirm that the speaker cables are not short circuited.
▪ (U.S.A., Canada, China, and Central and South America models only)
When using a banana plug, tighten the speaker terminal and insert a banana plug into the end of the
terminal.
a
FR
ON
T
Banana plug
b
20
R
2
Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper
right or bottom left) of the terminal.
b
PR
FRON E OUT
T SUB
WOOFE
1
Loosen the speaker terminal.
+ (red)
T
2
En
How to place speakers (speaker systems)
n Using 7.1/5.1.2-channel system
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents. We recommend this
speaker system to have a full effect of Dolby Atmos or DTS:X contents.
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1
NOTE
9
▪ When installing the presence speakers on the ceiling above the listening position, or when using Dolby
Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, the presence speaker layout settings must be changed. For
details, see the following:
2
3
1.8 m (5.9 ft)
▪ The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP 3D.
R
1.8 m (5.9 ft)
9
4
5
10° to 30°
10° to 30°
– “Setting the layout of the presence speakers” (p.112)
▪ You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
6
7
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
CENTER
FRONT
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
1
2
9 9
21
En
54 3 2 1 76 RE
n For Overhead of the presence speakers layout
n Using 5.1.2-channel system
To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos or DTS:X contents, we recommend this speaker
system. The presence speakers produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field including
overhead.
E
R
NOTE
▪ When installing the presence speakers on the ceiling above the listening position, or when using Dolby
Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, the presence speaker layout settings must be changed. For
details, see the following:
1
– “Setting the layout of the presence speakers” (p.112)
▪ You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
3
9
n For Front Height of the presence speakers layout
2
9
4
5
10° to 30°
10° to 30°
E
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1
1.8 m (5.9 ft)
9
R
2
3
1.8 m (5.9 ft)
9
SPEAKERS
4
5
10° to 30°
SURROUND
10° to 30°
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
CENTER
FRONT
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
1
2
9 9
22
En
54 3 2 1
RE
n Using 7.1-channel system
This speaker system allows you to enjoy extended surround sound using the surround
back speakers.
NOTE
You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
1
2
3
9
9
4
5
10° to 30°
10° to 30°
6
7
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
CENTER
FRONT
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
1
2
9 9
23
En
54 3 2 1 76
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
n Using 5.1-channel system
This is a basic speaker layout recommended for enjoying surround sound.
NOTE
You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
1
2
3
9
4
5
10° to 30°
10° to 30°
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
1
2
9
24
En
54 3 2 1
n Using 3.1.2-channel system
We recommend this speaker layout when you cannot place speakers in the back of
the room. You can also enjoy Dolby Atmos or DTS:X content with this speaker system.
NOTE
E
▪ When installing the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position or using the Dolby
Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure your presence speaker layout. For details, see the
following:
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1
– “Setting the layout of the presence speakers” (p.112)
1.8 m (5.9 ft)
▪ You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
9
R
2
1.8 m (5.9 ft)
3
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
CENTER
FRONT
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
1
2
9
25
En
321
RE
n Using Virtual CINEMA FRONT
This speaker layout is recommended if you cannot place speakers in the back of the
room.
NOTE
▪ To use Virtual CINEMA FRONT, the speaker configuration settings must be changed. For details, see the
following:
1
– “Assigning speaker configuration” (p.41)
2
4
– “Setting the layout of the surround speakers” (p.111)
▪ You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
5
3
9
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
1
2
9
26
En
54 3 2 1
n 7.1 + 1Zone
Advanced speaker systems
n Available configurations for advanced speaker systems
using the unit’s internal amplifier
In addition to the basic speaker systems, the unit also allows you to apply the following
speaker configurations to enhance your system.
1
3
9
• Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers to have more high-quality sounds
(Bi-amp connection)
2
9
4
• Using the excess internal amplifiers for stereo speakers in another room (multi-zone
function)
1
2
5
6
7
Zone2
To enjoy following systems, configure the necessary speaker settings in “Power Amp
Assign” in the “Setup” menu. For details, see the following:
• “Setting your speaker system” (p.109)
Main zone
Main zone
Output channel
(max)
Bi-amp
7
Surround back/
Presence
Multi-zone
Power Amp Assign
Surround back
+1 (Zone2)
7.1 + 1Zone
Presence
+1 (Zone2)
5.1.2 + 1Zone
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
NOTE
67
EXTRA SP2
For details on connecting speakers in another room (multi-zone function), see the following:
ER
(not used)
▪ “Connecting Zone2 speakers using the unit’s internal amplifier” (p.55)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP1
7
5

5.1 BI-Amp
NOTE
When Zone2 output is enabled, the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. For
details on Zone2 output, see the following:
▪ “Controlling Zone2” (p.58)
27
En
n 5.1 BI-Amp
n 5.1.2 + 1Zone
Bi-amp
E
R
1
1
2
3
9
2
1
2
9
4
9
5
4
3
9
5
Zone2
Main zone
Speaker
Connect to
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP2 (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
(not used)
67
(not used)
ER
EXTRA SP1
ER
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP2
NOTE
When Zone2 output is enabled, the presence speakers in the main zone do not output sound. For details on
Zone2 output, see the following:
▪ “Controlling Zone2” (p.58)
28
En
n Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp
The unit (rear)
connections
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
You can connect the front speakers that support bi-amp connections.
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the necessary speaker settings. For details,
see the following:
1
• “Assigning speaker configuration” (p.41)
• “Setting your speaker system” (p.109)
NOTICE
▪ Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
1
2
NOTE
▪ The following speakers cannot be connected simultaneously.
– Surround back speakers
– Bi-amp speakers
▪ The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP2 terminals output the same signals.
29
En
2 Connecting a TV
HDMI connection with a TV
HDMI connection with another TV or a projector
Connect a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to
the unit, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control. For details, see the following:
The unit (rear)
• “Selecting an HDMI output jack” (p.61)
HDMI OUT jack
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
HDMI input
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
2
2
1
OUT
1
ARC
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI
HDMI OUT
ANTENNA
AUDIO 1
( HDCP2.2 )
( 2 RADIO )
( 7 TV )
FM
OPTICAL
TV
ARC
HDMI
REMOTE
The unit (rear)
HDMI
1
2
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
AM
2
1
AUDIO 2
( 3 MUSIC )
ARC
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
OPTICAL
2
AUDIO 3
AV 1
1
OUT
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
COAXIAL
1
ARC
(1 MOVIE)
VIDEO
REMOTE
ANTENNA
AUDIO 1
( 2 RADIO )
( 7 TV )
Y
ZONE OUT
AUDIO 4
FM
OPTICAL
PR
PB
AUDIO 5
ZONE 2
PRE OUT
FRONT
AM
HDMI
COAXIAL
PHONO
AUDIO 2
( 3 MUSIC )
OPTICAL
GND
AUDIO 3
AV 1
TV (already connected)
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
COAXIAL
HDMI
HDMI input
VIDEO
HDMI
COAXIAL
TV
Y
PR
PB
AUDIO 4
PHONO
AUDIO 5
GND
Projector
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
▪ ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways with a single HDMI cable. To use ARC, connect to the TV
using an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
NOTE
HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
NOTE
▪ If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.
▪ To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the
settings, see the following:
– “HDMI Control and synchronized operations” (p.190)
– “Audio Return Channel (ARC)” (p.191)
▪ If your TV does not support Audio Return Channel (ARC), a digital optical cable connection between the
TV and the unit is needed.
30
En
3 Connecting playback devices
HDMI connection with a video device such as a
BD/DVD player
Connection other than HDMI with a playback device
n VIDEO (component video) connection with a video
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
The unit (rear)
device
HDMI 1–5 jacks
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital coaxial
cable.
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
1
2
3
4
5
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
(1 MOVIE)
1
1
ARC
(1 MOVIE)
2
3
(5 STB)
4
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
Output jacks on video device
5
(6 GAME)
Video
Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial
ANTENNA
( 2 RADIO )
FM
AM
SPEAKERS
AV 1
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
HDMI
HDMI OUT jack
Input jacks on the unit
AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO +
COAXIAL)
PR
ZONE OUT
AUDIO 4
AUDIO 5
ZONE 2
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
HDMI
1
2
Audio output
(digital coaxial)
HDMI
The unit (rear)
Video device
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
AV 1 (COAXIAL) jack
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
2
1
OUT
1
ARC
(1 MOVIE)
2
(5 STB)
C
REMOTE
ANTENNA
AUDIO 1
COAXIAL
( 2 RADIO )
( 7 TV )
FM
OPTICAL
AM
C
AUDIO 2
( 3 MUSIC )
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OPTICAL
AUDIO 3
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
COAXIAL
Y
PR
PR
PB
ZONE OUT
AUDIO 4
PHONO
AUDIO 5
GND
Y
PB
PR
ZONE 2
PRE OUT
FRONT
PR
PR
PB
PB
Y
Y
Video device
PB
Y
AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jack
Video output (component video)
NOTE
▪ This unit supports only the video signals of 480i and 576i (resolution).
▪ If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device,
change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. For details, see the following:
– “Combining audio of another input source with video of the current input source” (p.142)
31
En
n VIDEO (composite video) connection with a video
Audio output jacks on audio device
Audio input jacks on the unit
Digital optical
AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
AV 1 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
AUDIO 4–5 (AUDIO)
AV 2 (AUDIO)
Turntable (PHONO)
PHONO
device
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Audio
Composite video
Analog stereo
AV 2 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
The unit
(rear)
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
2
1
OUT
1
ARC
Video output
(composite video)
AV 2 (VIDEO) jack
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
O
VIDEO
ANTENNA
( 7 TV )
( 2 RADIO )
FM
OPTICAL
1
AM
AUDIO 1
ANTENNA
( 7 TV )
( 2 RADIO )
FM
OPTICAL
AUDIO 2
AV 1
AM
AUDIO 3
VIDEO
AV 1
Video device
COAXIAL
AUDIO 5
Y
C
R
PR
PB
ZONE OUT
L
L
AUDIO 4
PHONO
L
ZONE 2
AUDIO 5
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
1
GND
GND
R
R
R
Audio device
L
VIDEO
COAXIAL
ZONE
AUDIO 4
L
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
COAXIAL
PR
PB
COAXIAL
O
OPTICAL
L
Y
PHONO
4
(6 GAME)
OPTICAL
( 3 MUSIC )
V
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
3
(5 STB)
C
AUDIO 2
V
AUDIO 3
2
(1 MOVIE)
REMOTE
( 3 MUSIC )
COAXIAL
1
ARC
VIDEO
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
2
OUT
AUDIO 1
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
(1 MOVIE)
REMOTE
Audio output
(either digital optical, digital coaxial, or
analog stereo)
AV 1-2 jacks
AUDIO 1-5 jacks
L
R
2
R
R
PHONO
L
PHONO
AV 2 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(analog stereo)
L
L
R
R
GND
R
GND
NOTE
Turntable
PHONO jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device. For details, see the following:
Ground lead
Audio output (PHONO)
NOTE
▪ “Combining audio of another input source with video of the current input source” (p.142)
▪ The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output
MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
n AUDIO connection with an audio device such as a CD
▪ Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
player
▪ “AUDIO1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO
1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the
SCENE function, you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (7). For details, see the
following:
Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on
the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following
connections.
– “Setting the audio jack used for TV audio input” (p.129)
– “Registering a scene” (p.90)
32
En
Connecting to the jack on the front panel
Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable
audio players to the unit.
CAUTION
▪ Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. The
volume may be unexpectedly loud, and this could result in damage to hearing.
NOTE
You need to prepare the audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
VOLUME
SCENE
1
PHONES
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
TONE CONTROL
2
3
PROGRAM
4
STRAIGHT
(CONNECT)
USB
5V
1A
AUX
AUDIO
The unit (front)
Portable audio player
If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the audio played back on
the device will be output from the unit.
33
En
4 Connecting the radio antennas
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
Connecting the FM/AM antennas (Except for U.K.,
Europe, Russia and Australia models)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
FM antenna
AM antenna
Hold down
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
2
1
OUT
Insert
NETWORK
(4 NET RADIO)
(8 SERVER)
1
ARC
(1 MOVIE)
2
3
(5 STB)
4
5
(6 GAME)
REMOTE
ANTENNA
AUDIO 1
( 2 RADIO )
( 7 TV )
FM
OPTICAL
AM
AUDIO 2
( 3 MUSIC )
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
NOTE
SPEAKERS
AUDIO 3
AV 1
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
COAXIAL
Y
VIDEO
SURROUND
FRONT
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
▪ Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
▪ The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
PR
PB
ZONE OUT
PHONO
CENTER
AUDIO 4
AUDIO 5
ZONE 2
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
The unit (rear)
34
En
Release
Connecting the DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe,
Russia and Australia models)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
DAB/FM antenna
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
HDMI ( HDCP2.2 )
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
2
1
OUT
1
ARC
(1 MOVIE)
2
3
(5 STB)
4
(6 GAME)
REMOTE
AUDIO 1
ANTENNA
( 7 TV )
( 2 RADIO )
DAB/FM
75 Ω
OPTICAL
AUDIO 2
( 3 MUSIC )
OPTICAL
AUDIO 3
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
COAXIAL
Y
PHONO
PR
PB
AUDIO 4
AUDIO 5
VIDEO
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
1
GND
2
NOTE
▪ The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
▪ If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
35
En
5 Preparing for connecting to a network
Preparing for connecting to a network
Internet
Network Attached Storage (NAS)
The unit supports wired and wireless connections. Select a connection method
according to your network environment.
WAN
If you are using a router that supports DHCP in the wired connection, you do not need
to configure any network settings for the unit.
LAN
Modem
NOTE
You need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure
the network parameters manually. For details, see the following:
PC
The unit (rear)
Network cable
▪ “Setting the network parameters manually” (p.132)
Wireless router
NETWORK
(4 NET RADIO)
(8 SERVER)
To connect the unit to a wireless network, select one of the following methods to
configure the wireless network settings.
l Method using the MusicCast setting
When adding the unit to the MusicCast network, you can also configure the unit’s
wireless network settings at once. If you use MusicCast CONTROLLER, we
recommend the wireless connection to MusicCast network. For details, see the
following:
– “Adding the unit to the MusicCast network” (p.48)
SPEAKERS
CENTER
FRONT
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
NOTE
l Other methods
For details, see the following:
– “Selecting a wireless network connection method” (p.173)
▪ If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the
unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only
need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the
network parameters manually. For details, see the following:
Connecting a network cable (wired connection)
– “Setting the network parameters manually” (p.132)
▪ You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit.
For details, see the following:
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable
(CAT-5 or higher straight cable).
– “Checking the network information on the unit” (p.131)
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
36
En
Preparing wireless antennas (wireless connection)
6 Connecting other devices
Stand the wireless antennas upright for connecting to the wireless network or a
Bluetooth device wirelessly.
Connecting an external power amplifier
For information on how to connect the unit to a wireless network, see the following:
When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker
output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.
The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
• “Preparing for connecting to a network” (p.36)
CAUTION
▪ To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
– Unplug the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
– When using an external amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, do not connect other
devices (except the unit) to the amplifier.
NOTICE
▪ Do not apply excessive force on the wireless antenna. Doing so may damage the antenna.
37
En
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger
function
The unit (rear)
HDMI ( HDCP2.2 )
NETWORK
(4 NET RADIO)
(8 SERVER)
1
(1 MOVIE)
3
2
(5 STB)
4
5
(6 GAME)
AC IN
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer
that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use
the trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack with a
monaural mini-jack cable.
SPEAKERS
AV 2
VIDEO
SURROUND
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
CENTER
FRONT
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
1
2
TRIGGER OUT jack
ab
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
1
FRONT jacks
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
2
1
OUT
1
ARC
(1 MOVIE)
2
(5 STB)
REMOTE
Output front channel sounds.
AUDIO 1
ANTENNA
( 7 TV )
( 2 RADIO )
FM
OPTICAL
System connector
jack
AM
AUDIO 2
( 3 MUSIC )
OPTICAL
AUDIO 3
2
SUBWOOFER 1–2 jacks
COAXIAL
For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier.
AV 1
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
COAXIAL
Y
VIDEO
PR
PB
ZONE OUT
AUDIO 4
PHONO
AUDIO 5
ZONE 2
GND
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
The unit (rear)
NOTE
You can configure the trigger function settings. For details, see the following:
▪ “Specifying the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized” (p.147)
38
En
7 Plugging in the power cable
Plugging in the power cable
WARNING
(Central and South America model only)
Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall
outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential
fire hazard.
Before plugging in the power cable
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–
120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
AC IN
220V240V
110V120V
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
BI-AMP
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
The unit (rear)
NETWORK
(4 NET RADIO)
(8 SERVER)
AC IN
SPEAKERS
FRONT
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
To an AC wall outlet
39
En
8 Selecting the on-screen menu language
Selecting the on-screen menu language
7
This completes the necessary settings.
Select the desired on-screen menu language.
1
2
NOTE
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the
unit (HDMI OUT jack).
NOTE
When you turn on the unit for the first time, a message regarding the network setup appears. You
can switch the language on this message screen.
3
4
5
6
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select “System” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.
40
En
9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
Assigning speaker configuration
5
If you use any of the following speaker configurations, perform the following procedure
to configure the corresponding speaker settings manually before performing YPAO.
• Using the bi-amp connection (playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp
connections)
• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback
▪ Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback, select
your presence speaker layout in “Configuration”. For details, see the
following:
– “Setting the layout of the presence speakers” (p.112)
NOTE
For details on the speaker configurations, see the following:
▪ “Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections” (p.29)
▪ “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.55)
▪ “Using Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.26)
6
▪ “Presence speaker layout” (p.182)
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
This completes the speaker settings.
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the
unit (HDMI OUT jack).
NOTE
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now,
press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
4
▪ Using bi-amp connections or Zone2 speakers, select your speaker
system in “Power Amp Assign”. For details, see the following:
– “Setting your speaker system” (p.109)
▪ Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT), select your surround speaker layout in “Configuration”.
For details, see the following:
– “Setting the layout of the surround speakers” (p.111)
• Using the Zone2 speakers
1
2
Configure the corresponding speaker settings.
Press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select “Speaker” and press ENTER.
41
En
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically
(YPAO)
The unit (front)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker
connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then
automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
1
2
NOTE
▪ Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
9
3
▪ Configure the corresponding speaker settings manually before performing YPAO. For details on the
settings, see the following:
– “Assigning speaker configuration” (p.41)
4
▪ During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume, and you cannot adjust the volume.
5
▪ During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible and do not stand between the
speakers and the YPAO microphone for accurate measurement.
▪ Do not connect headphones.
1
2
3
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the
unit (HDMI OUT jack).
The following screen appears on the TV.
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover
frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
VOLUME
MIN
4
Ear height
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
9
MAX
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and
connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as
your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand.
You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
NOTE
▪ To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement.
▪ To configure the power amplifier assignment setting, press RETURN and select “Speaker” in the
“Setup” menu. For details, see the following:
– “Setting your speaker system” (p.109)
42
En
5
7
To start the measurement, press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Save” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to start the
measurement immediately.
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes.
1
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
NOTE
To finish the measurement without applying the result, select “Cancel”.
1
Warning message (if available)
8
NOTE
▪ To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
▪ If any error message or warning message appears, see the following:
NOTICE
– “Error messages from YPAO” (p.46)
▪ The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be
exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment).
– “Warning messages from YPAO” (p.47)
6
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Confirm the results displayed on the screen.
NOTE
NOTE
To check the measurement results specifically, select “Measurement result” and press ENTER. For
details, see the following:
▪ “Checking the YPAO measurement results” (p.44)
43
“YPAO Volume” in the “Option” menu is automatically enabled after the YPAO measurement. Then, the highand low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume. For details on “YPAO Volume”, see the following:
▪ “Adjusting the high- and low-frequency levels automatically according to the volume” (p.95)
En
Checking the YPAO measurement results
3
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measurement result” and press ENTER.
NOTE
You can also check the previous measurement results in the “Setup” menu. For details, see the
following:
▪ “Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments” (p.115)
The following screen appears.
a
b
2
1
Measurement result items
2
Measurement result details
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
Polarity of each speaker
Wiring
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse
polarity (+/-).
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer)
Size
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Distance
Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level
Output level adjustment for each speaker
44
En
To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen,
press RETURN.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
5
This completes the settings.
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the
procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO
adjustments.
1
2
3
4
Press SETUP.
NOTE
For details, see the following:
▪ “Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments” (p.115)
Press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select “Speaker” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “YPAO Result” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER.
45
En
Error messages from YPAO
Error message
Remedy
ERROR 1
Front speakers are not
detected.
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and
perform YPAO again.
ERROR 2
One of the surround speakers
cannot be detected.
ERROR 3
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker
connections.
One of the front presence
speakers cannot be detected.
Error message
ERROR 4
One of the surround back
speakers cannot be detected.
ERROR 5
The noise is too loud.
ERROR 6
TV screen
Surround back speakers are
connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
ERROR 7
The YPAO microphone has
been removed.
ERROR 8
The YPAO microphone cannot
detect test tones.
ERROR 9
Canceled by user operation
Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select “Proceed”,
YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise
detected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use
surround back speakers. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then
reconnect the speakers.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
Retry or exit YPAO as necessary. To exit the YPAO, use the
cursor keys to select “Quit” and press ENTER.
Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs
repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
An internal error has occurred. service center.
ERROR 10
NOTE
▪ To exit the YPAO measurement for resolving the problem, use the cursor keys to select “Quit” and press
ENTER.
▪ For the ERROR 5 and ERROR 9 messages only, you can proceed with the current YPAO measurement.
Use the cursor keys to select “Proceed” and press ENTER.
▪ To retry the YPAO measurement from beginning, use the cursor keys to select “Retry” and press ENTER.
46
En
Warning messages from YPAO
Warning message
Remedy
Use the cursor keys to select “Measurement result” and press
ENTER, and then select “Wiring” in “Measurement result”.
Check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”.
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still apply the
measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the
optimal speaker settings.
WARNING 1
A speaker cable may be
connected with the reverse
polarity (+/-).
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this
message may appear even if the speakers are connected
correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
Warning message
WARNING 2
A speaker is placed more than
24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
TV screen
WARNING 3
There are significant volume
differences between the
speakers.
47
En
Use the cursor keys to select “Measurement result” and press
ENTER, and then select “Distance” in “Measurement result”.
Check the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)”. Exit
YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker within
24 m (80 ft) of the listening position.
Use the cursor keys to select “Measurement result” and press
ENTER, and then select “Level” in “Measurement result”.
Check the speaker identified by “>+10.0dB” or “<-10.0dB”.
Then, check the usage environment and cable connections
(+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there
is any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect
speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We
recommend using the same speakers or speakers with
specifications that are as similar as possible.
10 Setting MusicCast
What is MusicCast
2
MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha, allowing you to
share music among all of your rooms with a variety of devices. You can enjoy music
from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and music streaming service anywhere in your
house with one easy-to-use application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast
compatible products, refer to the following site:
http://www.yamaha.com/musiccast/
• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated application
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
CONNECT
• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different room and play
them back simultaneously.
3
• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music streaming
services may differ depending on your region and product).
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the
onscreen instructions to set up the network.
This completes adding the unit to the MusicCast network and the network settings.
• Configure wireless network settings of MusicCast compatible devices.
NOTE
▪ AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
Using MusicCast CONTROLLER
▪ When the Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources, Bluetooth and USB
cannot be delivered.
To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you need the
dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the operation. Search for the
free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play and
install it to your device.
▪ If you configure the unit's wireless settings with this method, the wireless LAN indicator of the front display
lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even if a wired connection is used).
▪ You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit (the MusicCast master). For
details on the settings, see the following:
– “Setting the power interlock from the unit to MusicCast compatible devices” (p.134)
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network
Perform the following procedure to add the unit to the MusicCast network. You can
also configure the unit’s wireless network settings at once.
NOTE
The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.
1
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the
on screen instructions, then hold down CONNECT on the front
panel of the unit for 5 seconds.
Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on your
mobile device and tap “Setup”.
NOTE
If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the network, tap “Settings”
and then “Add New Device”.
48
En
ENJOYING SOUND
Enjoying sound field effects
Enjoying 3D sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)
Select your favorite sound mode
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that
allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound
field effect or stereo playback).
MAIN
MAI
N
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original
DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like
actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural threedimensional sound fields.
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTYY
PART
MAIN
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
OUT
ZONE 2
Sound program category
PURE DIRECT
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
“CINEMA DSP” lights up
SCENE
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
LINK MASTER
1
INPUT
USB
2
3
4
OUT
2
ECO
BLUETOOTH
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
5
6
7
8
HOME
NOTE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
BASS
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
BAND
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
TUNING
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
Sound program
INPUT
TOP
MENU
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
Sci-Fi
PRESET
TUNING
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
V
VOL
VO
OLUME
OLUME
LUME
BASS
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
BASS
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
▪ You can adjust the sound field effect level. For details, see the following:
– “Adjusting the sound field effect level” (p.119)
▪ The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
▪ We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound
fields. However, even when no presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence
Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.
STRAIGHT
MEM
ME
MEMORY
MORY
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
BAN
BAND
AND
D
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
NOTE
▪ If a multichannel source (6.1/7.1-channel) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the
unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth
to the rear sound field.
▪ The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
▪ When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
▪ You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the
front display.
49
En
Enjoying sound field effects optimized for the type of
content
Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs.
You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in
front.
You can enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode, such as with a sound
field effect added or with stereo playback.
When “Layout” in “Surround” in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the
virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround
sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
• We recommend a sound program in the “MOVIE” category to enjoy video content.
• We recommend a sound program in the “MUSIC” category to enjoy music content.
For details on the sound programs, see the following:
NOTE
• “Selecting sound programs” (p.118)
▪ For details on the settings, see the following:
NOTE
▪ When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up on the front display.
– “Setting the layout of the surround speakers” (p.111)
You can select a sound program by pressing PROGRAM.
Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT
CINEMA)
Enjoying sound field effects without surround
speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound
field using the front speakers.
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.
NOTE
When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up on the front display.
50
En
Enjoying unprocessed playback
Enjoying multichannel playback without sound field
effects (surround decoder)
Enjoying original sound (straight decode)
When STRAIGHT is pressed and the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit
produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs,
and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder. The surround decoder enables
multichannel playback from 2-channel sources without sound field effects.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
STRAIGHT
MAIN
ZONE 2
SLEEP
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
PARTY
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled.
1
2
3
5
6
7
TUNER
NET
4
8
INPUT
ENHAN
ENHA
ENHANCER
NCER
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
RED
NOTE
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
PROG
PR
PROGRAM
OGRA
RAM
M SUR. DECODE
▪ When surround back speakers are used, the unit produces 7.1-channel sound for 5.1-channel sources.
VOLUME
V
VOL
VO
OLUME
OLUME
LUME
SUR. DECODE
BASS
BASS
TOP
MENU
▪ If “Layout” in “Surround” in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT works when
multichannel source is played back. For details, see the following:
HOME
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
BASS
MEM
ME
MEMORY
MORY
STRAIGHT
– “Setting the layout of the surround speakers” (p.111)
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.50)
BAN
BAND
AND
D
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
“SUR. DECODE” appears
LINK MASTER
OUT
ECO
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
†‡ Dsur
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.
51
En
NOTE
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
▪ You can also change the surround decoder in “Surround Decoder” in the “Setup” menu. For details, see
the following:
When PURE DIRECT is pressed and the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit
plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi
sound quality.
– “Selecting the surround decoder used in the program” (p.122)
▪ For details on each decoder, see the following:
– “Glossary of audio decoding format” (p.184)
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi - Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
▪ You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “Surround Decoder” in the “Setup” menu. For details,
see the following:
OUT
2
ECO
PURE DIRECT
– “Adjusting the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field” (p.123)
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is enabled or disabled.
– “Setting the use of Center Spread” (p.123)
NOTE
▪ The selected surround decoder may not work for some input sources.
▪ We recommend Dolby Surround while network streaming is Dolby contents.
When the Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
▪ When the Dolby Surround decoder or the Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) does not work. For details, see the following:
▪ Using the multi-zone function
▪ Selecting sound programs
– “Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.50)
▪ Adjusting the tone control
– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.50)
▪ Operating the on-screen “Setup” and “Option” menus
▪ Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
52
En
Enjoying enhanced bass sound
Enjoying enhanced compressed music
Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)
Playing back digitally compressed formats with
enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Press BASS to enable Extra Bass and enjoy enhanced bass sound, regardless of the
size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of a subwoofer.
Each time you press the key, Extra Bass is enabled or disabled.
Press ENHANCER to enable Compressed Music Enhancer and add depth and
breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other
sound modes.
NOTE
You can also use “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Extra Bass. For details, see the
following:
▪ “Setting the use of Extra Bass” (p.98)
“ENHANCER” lights up
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
Enhancer On
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled.
NOTE
▪ Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
– DSD audio
▪ You can also use “Enhancer” in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. For
details, see the following:
– “Setting Compressed Music Enhancer” (p.97)
53
En
Enjoying Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™
Enjoying Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™
Playing back Dolby Atmos or DTS:X content creates realistic sound that comes from
every direction, including overhead. To receive the full effect of Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
content, we recommend a speaker system with presence speakers.
NOTE
For details on the speaker system with the presence speakers, see the following:
▪ “Using 7.1/5.1.2-channel system” (p.21)
▪ “Using 5.1.2-channel system” (p.22)
About Dolby Atmos®
▪ Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in the following situations.
(Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as Dolby Atmos.)
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
▪ When the Dolby Atmos decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA
FRONT) does not work. For details, see the following:
– “Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.50)
– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.50)
About DTS:X™
▪ When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue sounds in “DTS
Dialogue Control” in the “Option” menu. For details, see the following:
– “Adjusting the volume of dialogue sound during DTS:X™ playback” (p.96)
▪ When the DTS:X decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
does not work. For details, see the following:
– “Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.50)
– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.50)
54
En
Enjoying music in multiple rooms
Playing back music in multiple rooms
Connecting Zone2 speakers
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in another room (Zone2).
n Connecting Zone2 speakers using the unit’s internal
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main zone), another person
can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
Two methods for connecting the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit are
available; using the unit’s internal amplifier or using an external amplifier. When using
an external amplifier, you can select 7.1/5.1.2-channel speaker system in Main zone.
amplifier
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with a speaker cable.
NOTICE
▪ Unplug the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet before connecting the speakers.
• “Connecting Zone2 speakers using the unit’s internal amplifier” (p.55)
To enable the multi-zone function, configure the necessary speaker settings. For
details, see the following:
• “Connecting Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier” (p.57)
• “Available configurations for advanced speaker systems using the unit’s internal
amplifier” (p.27)
• “Assigning speaker configuration” (p.41)
• “Setting your speaker system” (p.109)
NOTE
You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier. For details, see the following:
▪ “Connecting Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier” (p.57)
Study room (Zone2)
Living room (Main zone)
NOTE
▪ Digital and analog audio sources (including radio), Bluetooth, USB, and network sources can be output to
Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the
AUDIO jacks (AV 1-2, AUDIO 1-5 or PHONO jacks) of the unit.
▪ “Main Zone Sync” allows you to play back the same audio output in Main zone as Zone2. When “Main
Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2 input, the Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the
input source selected in the main zone.
▪ The party mode allows you to play back the same audio output in Main zone as Zone2, whatever the input
audio signal type. Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the Zone2. For
details on the party mode, see the following:
– “Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode)” (p.59)
55
En
n When using surround back speakers in the main zone
n When using presence speakers in the main zone
Connect Zone2 speakers to the EXTRA SP1 terminals. To utilize the EXTRA SP
terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu to “7.1
+1Zone”. For details, see the following:
Connect Zone2 speakers to the EXTRA SP2 terminals. To utilize the EXTRA SP
terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu to “5.1.2
+1Zone”. For details, see the following:
• “Setting your speaker system” (p.109)
• “Setting your speaker system” (p.109)
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
SURROUND
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
CENTER
EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK
/ ZONE2 / BI-AMP
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
/ ZONE2
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
1
1
2
2
E
1
9
FRONT
2
1
3
9
4
5
6
R
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
7
Zone2
Zone2
Main zone
Main zone
56
En
n Connecting Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier
Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable.
You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control
supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the
unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.
NOTICE
▪ Unplug the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting an external amplifier.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
NOTE
IN
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
You can connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see the following:
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
OUT
2
1
OUT
▪ “Connecting Zone2 speakers using the unit’s internal amplifier” (p.55)
1
ARC
REMOTE
2
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
REMOTE
ANTENNA
AUDIO 1
( 2 RADIO )
( 7 TV )
FM
OPTICAL
AM
AUDIO 2
( 3 MUSIC )
The unit (rear)
OPTICAL
AUDIO 3
AV 1
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
COAXIAL
VIDEO
TRIGGER OUT
0.1A
HDMI
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
COAXIAL
Y
PR
PB
ZONE OUT
2
1
OUT
1
ARC
(1 MOVIE)
2
AUDIO 4
PHONO
3
AUDIO 5
ZONE 2
(5 STB)
GND
TE
ANTENNA
AUDIO 1
( 2 RADIO )
( 7 TV )
FM
OPTICAL
AM
AUDIO 2
( 3 MUSIC )
OPTICAL
AUDIO 3
AV 2
Y
ZONE2 OUT jacks
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
PR
PB
ZONE OUT
AUDIO 4
PHONO
ZONE 2
AUDIO 5
PRE OUT
SUBW
FRONT
ZONE OUT
The unit (rear)
ZONE 2
L
GND
R
Infrared signal
transmitter
External amplifier Audio
input (analog stereo)
Infrared signal
receiver
L
Q
W
External device
(such as a CD player)
R
1
9
2
AUDIO
Remote control (supplied
with each device)
3
Zone2
4
5
6
7
Main zone
Zone2
Main zone
NOTE
You can adjust the volume for Zone2 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with volume
control, set “Volume” in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”. For details, see the following:
▪ “Setting the use of volume adjustments for Zone2 output” (p.137)
57
En
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that
support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals
by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
3
NOTE
▪ Presses NET repeatedly to select a desired network source.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
REMOTE
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
▪ You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example,
if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for
the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.
4
REMOTE
Start playback on the external device or select a radio station.
NOTE
Infrared signal receiver
▪ The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display to control Zone2.
▪ AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone.
Yamaha products (up to
six, including the unit)
▪ Press SCENE to select the input source and settings with just one touch using the SCENE
function. For details on the SCENE function, see the following:
– “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)” (p.88)
▪ To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP repeatedly. The
Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of time.
Remote control
▪ To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the unit’s internal amplifier).
▪ To enable the Compressed Music Enhancer function, press ENHANCER.
▪ The Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source selected in the main
zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2 input.
Zone2
▪ To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input or use the party
mode.
▪ Depending on the “Remote Key” setting, the PROGRAM Key may be also available in Zone2.
Controlling Zone2
CAUTION
Basic procedure for playing back music in Zone2 is as follows.
1
2
▪ To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
Set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”.
Press z (receiver power).
Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or disabled. When
Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display.
58
En
Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party
mode)
Press PARTY, and then the party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same
music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo
playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to
use main zone music as background music for a house party.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.
NOTE
If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” in the “Setup” menu to “Enable”. For details,
see the following:
▪ “Setting the use of switching to the party mode on Zone2” (p.140)
59
En
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure
Basic procedure for playing back video and music
3
4
Basic procedure for playing back video and music is as follows.
1
2
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player)
connected to the unit.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
▪ To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
▪ Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
TUNER
NET
RED
RE
D
GGREEN
GREE
REEEN
RE
INPUT
MAIN
Input selection keys
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
5
6
7
TUNER
NET
USB
BLUETOOTH
4
8
PRESET
INPUT
USB
BLUETOOTH
YEL
YELLOW
ELLLOW
BLUE
BLUE
PRESET
RED
TOP
MENU
GREEN
YELLOW
HOME
BLUE
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHAN
ENHA
ENHANCER
NCER
BASS
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
UR. DECODE
DECOD
DEC
ODEE
PROG
PR
PROGRAM
OGRA
RAM
M SSUR.
VOLUME
BASS
BASS
VOLUME
MUTE
STRAIGHT
MEM
ME
MEMORY
MOR Y
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
BAN
BAND
AND
D
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
NOTE
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
1
Start playback on the external device or select a radio station.
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
60
En
Selecting an HDMI output jack
Currently input source
Press HDMI OUT to select the HDMI OUT jacks for video/audio output.
AV
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output
changes.
AUX
OUT
AUDIO
2
ECO
HDMI OUT 1
HDMI OUT 1+2
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
HDMI OUT 1
Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 2
Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
HDMI OUT Off
Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
TUNER (FM/AM)
TUNER (DAB)
– “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)” (p.88)
Bluetooth
▪ When “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by
both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the
HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Switching information on the front display
Press INFO on the front panel to select between the various display items on the front
display, as shown in the following table.
OUT
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
2
Audio Decoder
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Item
OUT
2
†‡ Dsur
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP
Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*), IP
Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP
Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*), IP
Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC
MusicCast Link
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*),
IP Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC
NOTE
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied
separately to each input group which is shown in the table and divided by ruled lines.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP
Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder
is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding information
appears.
ECO
(U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models only)
For details, see the following:
• “Displaying the DAB information” (p.73)
▪ You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene. For details, see the following:
ECO
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a
Radio Data System broadcasting station. For details, see the
following:
• “Displaying the Radio Data System information” (p.79)
NOTE
LINK MASTER
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
PHONO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
Displayed item
HDMI
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Information
61
En
Item names and functions of the playback screen
External device
operation keys
The item names and functions of the playback screen, available when your TV is
connected to the unit via HDMI, are as follows.
a
Resumes playback from pause.
s
Stops playback.
d
Stops playback temporarily.
f
1
Function
g
Skips forward/backward.
NOTE
▪ Displayed items vary depending on the content of playback.
▪ Press RETURN to display the browse screen.
▪ When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the playback screen by
pressing the left cursor key. To display the playback screen again, press any cursor key. For details on
“Video Out”, see the following:
2
– “Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source” (p.99)
1
Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings, playback status (such as play/pause)
and elapsed time.
2
Playback information
Displays the artist name, song title and album name.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
MAIN
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
5
6
7
TUNER
NET
4
8
INPUT
ENHAN
ENHA
ENHANCER
NCER
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
UR. DECODE
DECOD
DEC
ODEE
PROG
PR
PROGRAM
OGRA
RAM
M SSUR.
VOLUME
V
VOL
VO
OLUME
OLUME
LUME
BASS
BASS
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
STRAIGHT
BASS
External device operation
keys
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
BAND
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
62
En
Item names and functions of the browse screen
Icon
Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
The item names and functions of the browse screen, available when your TV is
connected to the unit via HDMI, are as follows. The browse screen appears when the
next input source is selected.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the playback screen.
• USB
Moves to the next page of the list.
• SERVER
Moves 10 pages forward.
• NET RADIO
NOTE
▪ Displayed items vary depending on the content of playback.
1
▪ When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse screen by
pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any cursor key. For details on
“Video Out”, see the following:
– “Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source” (p.99)
2
4
3
1
Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings.
2
Contents list
Displays the list of contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER
to confirm the selection.
3
Item number/total
4
Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
63
En
Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models)
Setting the frequency steps
4
5
(Asia model only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM.
Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and
10 kHz for AM.
1
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN
ZONE z.
z (MAIN ZONE)
3
STRAIGHT
Press PROGRAM to select “TU”.
LINK MASTER
OUT
ECO
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
TU••••FM50/AM9
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it
on again.
This completes the settings.
Set the unit to standby mode.
PROGRAM
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
64
En
Selecting a frequency for reception
3
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency.
Press TUNING to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.
NOTE
MAIN
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation
of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models.
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
8
ENHAN
ENHA
ENHANCER
NCER
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
1
YELLOW
BLUE
UR. DECODE
DECOD
DEC
ODEE
PROG
PR
PROGRAM
OGRA
RAM
M SSUR.
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
VOLUME
V
VOL
VO
O
OLUME
L
LUME
UME
BASS
BASS
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
TOP
MENU
HOME
BAND
TUNING
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
STRAIGHT
BASS
MEM
ME
MEMORY
MORY
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
LINK MASTER
OUT
ECO
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
FM 87.50MHz
2
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
FM 98.50MHz
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
On the front display, “TUNED” lights up when the unit is receiving an
FM/AM radio station signal.
“STEREO” lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
NOTE
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details, see the
following:
▪ “Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source” (p.99)
65
En
Selecting a preset station
1
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
3
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
2
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press PRESET to select the desired radio station.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
MAIN
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
5
6
7
TUNER
NET
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
USB
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
NET
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
NOTE
INPUT
TOP
MENU
HOME
USB
To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys or PRESET to
select a preset number.
BLUETOOTH
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
The preset number from which to start the registration is displayed on the
front display.
8
INPUT
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
Preset
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PRESET
PRESET
VOLUME
BASS
RED
RE
D
STRAIGHT
GGREEN
GREE
REEEN
RE
YEL
YELLOW
ELLLOW
BLUE
BLUE
4
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
01:FM 87.50MHz
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Preset number from which to start the registration
NOTE
“No Presets” appears on the front display when no radio stations are registered.
The Auto Preset process starts and “SEARCH” appears during Auto
Preset.
Registering FM radio stations automatically (FM Auto
Preset)
NOTE
To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears on the front display and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.
NOTE
LINK MASTER
▪ You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.
OUT
ECO
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
Auto Preset
▪ To register AM radio stations, see the following:
– “Registering a radio station manually” (p.67)
66
En
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
Registering a radio station manually
4
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will
be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station
you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number
after the most recently registered number.
NOTE
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.
1
Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
MAIN
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
ENHAN
ENHA
ENHANCER
NCER
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
UR. DECODE
DECOD
DEC
ODEE
PROG
PR
PROGRAM
OGRA
RAM
M SSUR.
2
3
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
VOLUME
V
VOL
VO
OLUME
OLUME
LUME
BASS
BASS
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
STRAIGHT
BASS
Press TUNING to set a frequency.
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
BAN
BAND
AND
D
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
01:FM 98.50MHz
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Preset number
NOTE
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio
station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
02:Empty
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
This completes the registers.
67
En
Clearing preset stations
Clearing all preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
2
3
2
3
4
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
Preset
4
5
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
Press OPTION.
LINK MASTER
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR”.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
01:FM 98.50MHz
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Preset station to be cleared
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use
preset number is displayed.
01:Cleared
6
7
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR ALL”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared and
press ENTER.
ECO
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared.
Press OPTION.
This completes the clearing preset stations.
68
En
Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models)
Preparing the DAB tuning
3
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound and more
stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also receive DAB+ (an
upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations using MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2
audio codec, which has a more efficient transmission method.
Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
>>>------- 30%
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the first
DAB radio station as stored in station order.
NOTE
LINK MASTER
▪ The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
OUT
2
ECO
▪ Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being covered. For a list
of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDMB online at
http://www.worlddab.org/.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
BBC Radio 4
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
NOTE
▪ For details on the antenna connection, see the following:
▪ If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 2 appears again.
Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
– “Connecting the DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models)” (p.35)
▪ You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label. For details, see the following:
– “Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label” (p.74)
Before tuning into DAB radio stations, perform an initial scan.
1
2
▪ To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored, select “Init Scan” in
the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan again, the DAB radio stations currently
registered to the preset numbers will be cleared. For details, see the following:
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
– “Performing an initial scan for DAB radio reception” (p.102)
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front display if you have not
performed an initial scan yet.
LINK MASTER
OUT
ECO
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
Press [ENTER]
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
69
En
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
Selecting a preset DAB radio station
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial scan.
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
2
1
2
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
3
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
3
Press TUNING to select a DAB radio station.
MAIN
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press PRESET to select the desired DAB radio station.
MAIN
ZONE 2
SLEEP
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
PARTY
HDMI OUT
SCENE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
GREEN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ENHAN
ENHA
ENHANCER
NCER
INPUT
RED
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
TUNER
PURE DIRECT
USB
INPUT
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
PRESET
USB
BLUETOOTH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
UR. DECODE
DECOD
DEC
ODEE
PROG
PR
PROGRAM
OGRA
RAM
M SSUR.
YELLOW
BLUE
VOLUME
V
VOL
VO
O
OLUME
L
LUME
UME
INPUT
BASS
BASS
TOP
MENU
BAND
TUNING
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
TOP
MENU
HOME
BASS
PRESET
BASS
RED
RE
D
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
GGREEN
GREE
REEEN
RE
YEL
YELLOW
ELLLOW
BLUE
BLUE
MEMORY
BAND
TUNING
TUNING
TUNING
BAND
2
ECO
Daily Service
BAND
TUNING
TUNING
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
VOLUME
MEM
ME
MEMORY
MORY
STRAIGHT
TUNING
USB
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
PRESET:01
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
NOTE
NOTE
▪ “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not available.
“No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.
▪ When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
Secondary station
LINK MASTER
OUT
ECO
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
BBC National
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details, see the
following:
– “Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source” (p.99)
70
En
NOTE
Registering a DAB radio station as presets
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio
station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
LINK MASTER
NOTE
OUT
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
This completes the registers.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
3
4
Press TUNING to select a DAB radio station.
Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will
be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station
you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number
after the most recently registered number.
MAIN
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
ENHAN
ENHA
ENHANCER
NCER
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
UR. DECODE
DECOD
DEC
ODEE
PROG
PR
PROGRAM
OGRA
RAM
M SSUR.
VOLUME
V
VOL
VO
OLUME
OLUME
LUME
BASS
BASS
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
STRAIGHT
BASS
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
02:Empty
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.
1
2
2
ECO
BAN
BAND
AND
D
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
01:BBC Radio 4
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Preset number
71
En
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Clearing preset DAB radio stations
Clearing all preset DAB radio stations
Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
Clear all the DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
2
1
2
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
3
4
OUT
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
Preset
5
6
3
4
5
6
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
ECO
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR”.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR ALL”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared and
press ENTER.
01:Clear?
Preset station to be cleared
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use
preset number is displayed.
01:Cleared
7
8
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
Press OPTION.
LINK MASTER
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Repeat step 6 until all desired preset stations are cleared.
Press OPTION.
This completes the clearing preset stations.
72
En
Displaying the DAB information
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned into a DAB
radio station.
1
2
Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
Press INFO on the front panel to select between the various
display items.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
Program Type
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Item name
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding
information appears on the front display.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
Classic Music
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Information
Service Label
Station name
DLS (Dynamic Label
Segment)
Information on the current station
Ensemble Label
Ensemble name
Program Type
Station genre
Date And Time
Current date and time
Audio Mode
Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq.
Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality
Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program
Sound mode name
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
NOTE
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio station.
73
En
Checking reception strength of
each DAB channel label
n Checking reception strength of
each DAB channel label
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel
label (0 [none] to 100 [best]).
1
2
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the
input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and
then the DAB radio station currently selected
is displayed on the front display.
3
4
5
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune
AID” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select the
desired DAB channel label.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
5A
Level: 80
DAB channel label
6
Press RETURN.
This completes the checking.
n DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Reception strength
Channel label
13B
234.208 MHz
13C
Frequency
Channel label
235.776 MHz
13D
174.928 MHz
5A
237.488 MHz
13E
176.640 MHz
5B
239.200 MHz
13F
178.352 MHz
5C
180.064 MHz
5D
181.936 MHz
6A
183.648 MHz
6B
185.360 MHz
6C
187.072 MHz
6D
188.928 MHz
7A
190.640 MHz
7B
192.352 MHz
7C
194.064 MHz
7D
195.936 MHz
8A
197.648 MHz
8B
199.360 MHz
8C
201.072 MHz
8D
202.928 MHz
9A
204.640 MHz
9B
206.352 MHz
9C
208.064 MHz
9D
209.936 MHz
10A
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Frequency
232.496 MHz
211.648 MHz
10B
213.360 MHz
10C
215.072 MHz
10D
216.928 MHz
11A
218.640 MHz
11B
220.352 MHz
11C
222.064 MHz
11D
223.936 MHz
12A
225.648 MHz
12B
227.360 MHz
12C
229.072 MHz
12D
230.784 MHz
13A
74
En
Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models)
Selecting a frequency for FM radio reception
3
You can tune into an FM radio station by specifying its frequency.
Press TUNING to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.
NOTE
MAIN
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation
of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models.
1
2
3
5
6
7
TUNER
NET
4
8
ENHAN
ENHA
ENHANCER
NCER
INPUT
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
1
2
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
UR. DECODE
DECOD
DEC
ODEE
PROG
PR
PROGRAM
OGRA
RAM
M SSUR.
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
VOLUME
V
VOL
VO
O
OLUME
L
LUME
UME
BASS
BASS
TOP
MENU
HOME
BAND
TUNING
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
Press BAND to select the FM band.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
STRAIGHT
BASS
MEM
ME
MEMORY
MORY
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
LINK MASTER
OUT
ECO
2
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
FM 87.50MHz
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
FM 98.50MHz
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
On the front display, “TUNED” lights up when the unit is receiving an FM
radio station signal.
“STEREO” lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
NOTE
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details, see the
following:
▪ “Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source” (p.99)
75
En
Selecting a preset FM radio station
1
2
Tune into a registered FM radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
2
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the FM band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
Press BAND to select the FM band.
3
4
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
3
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press PRESET to select the desired FM radio station.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
MAIN
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
5
6
7
TUNER
NET
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
USB
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
NET
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
NOTE
INPUT
TOP
MENU
HOME
USB
To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys or PRESET to
select a preset number.
BLUETOOTH
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
The preset number from which to start the registration is displayed on the
front display.
8
INPUT
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
Preset
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PRESET
PRESET
VOLUME
BASS
RED
RE
D
STRAIGHT
GGREEN
GREE
REEEN
RE
YEL
YELLOW
ELLLOW
BLUE
BLUE
5
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
01:FM 87.50MHz
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Preset number from which to start the registration
NOTE
“No Presets” appears on the front display when no radio stations are registered.
The Auto Preset process starts and “SEARCH” appears during Auto
Preset.
Registering FM radio stations automatically (FM Auto
Preset)
NOTE
To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears on the front display and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.
NOTE
LINK MASTER
▪ You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.
OUT
ECO
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
Auto Preset
▪ (U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are registered automatically by the Auto Preset function.
76
En
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
Registering an FM radio station manually
4
Select an FM radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
The first time that you do register an FM radio station, the selected radio
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio
station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset
number after the most recently registered number.
NOTE
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.
1
2
Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
MAIN
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
8
INPUT
Press BAND to select the FM band.
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
ENHAN
ENHA
ENHANCER
NCER
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
UR. DECODE
DECOD
DEC
ODEE
PROG
PR
PROGRAM
OGRA
RAM
M SSUR.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
VOLUME
V
VOL
VO
OLUME
OLUME
LUME
BASS
BASS
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
3
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
STRAIGHT
BASS
Press TUNING to set a frequency.
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
BAN
BAND
AND
D
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
01:FM 98.50MHz
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Preset number
NOTE
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio
station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
02:Empty
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
This completes the registers.
77
En
Clearing preset FM radio stations
Clearing all preset FM radio stations
Clear FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
Clear all the FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
2
1
2
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the FM band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
3
4
OUT
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
Preset
5
6
3
4
5
6
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
ECO
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR”.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
01:FM 98.50MHz
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Preset station to be cleared
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use
preset number is displayed.
01:Cleared
7
8
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR ALL”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared and
press ENTER.
ECO
Press BAND to select the FM band.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
Press OPTION.
LINK MASTER
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Repeat step 6 until all desired preset stations are cleared.
Press OPTION.
This completes the clearing preset stations.
78
En
Displaying the Radio Data System information
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many
countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned
into a Radio Data System broadcasting station.
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station.
NOTE
We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations. For
details, see the following:
▪ “Registering FM radio stations automatically (FM Auto Preset)” (p.76)
2
Press INFO on the front panel to select between the various
display items.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
Program Type
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Item name
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding
information appears on the front display.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
Classics
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Information
Program Service
Program service name
Program Type
Current program type
Radio Text
Information on the current program
Clock Time
Current time
DSP Program
Sound mode name
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
Frequency
Frequency
NOTE
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio
station does not provide the Radio Data System service.
79
En
Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device
Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit
3
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on
the unit.
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
NOTE
▪ If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to
the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the
current Bluetooth connection.
▪ To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
The unit
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
NOTE
– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” in the “Setup” menu.
▪ Use the wireless antennas that are standing upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly. For
details, see the following:
– “Preparing wireless antennas (wireless connection)” (p.37)
▪ To use the Bluetooth function, turn on the Bluetooth function of a Bluetooth device.
▪ To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” in the “Setup” menu to “On”. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the use of Bluetooth®” (p.135)
▪ For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see the following:
– “Supported Bluetooth® devices” (p.187)
1
2
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source.
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the
unit).
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made.
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
80
En
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/
headphones
9
10
You can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the Bluetooth speakers/
headphones to be connected with the unit.
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” is displayed and
audio played back on the unit will be reproduced from the Bluetooth
speakers/headphones.
NOTE
The unit
If the desired Bluetooth device is not displayed on the list, set the Bluetooth device to the pairing
mode and then perform “Device Search” operation again.
Bluetooth speakers/headphones
11
NOTE
▪ Sounds will be also output from the speakers connected to the unit.
▪ AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
NOTE
▪ You cannot use the Bluetooth audio transmitter function and the Bluetooth audio receiver function at the
same time.
1
▪ When the Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB cannot be
delivered.
▪ To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
Use the input selection keys on the remote control to select an
input source.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
– Press the SETUP key, then use the cursor keys to select "Bluetooth", then "Transmitter", and then "Off".
Select an input source other than Bluetooth.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select “Bluetooth” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Audio Send” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Transmitter” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “On” and press RETURN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Device Search” and press ENTER
to search the Bluetooth devices.
The list of Bluetooth devices is displayed.
8
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
Use the cursor keys to display the desired Bluetooth speakers/
headphones and press ENTER.
81
En
Playing back music with AirPlay
Playback of iTunes/iPhone music contents with
AirPlay
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts
playback.
The AirPlay allows you to play back iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music on the unit
via network.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
iTunes
CAUTION
Router
▪ When you use iTunes/iPhone controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This
could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop
playback on the iTunes/iPhone immediately. We recommend volume controls from iTunes/iPhone
within the limited range by setting “AirPlay Volume Interlock” in the “Setup” menu.
The unit
PC
NOTE
(Wired network or wireless network)
▪ You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPhone. For details on the
settings, see the following:
– “Setting the use of the Network Standby function” (p.132)
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch
▪ You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPhone. For details,
see the following:
– “Setting the network name of the unit” (p.134)
NOTE
▪ You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPhone during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPhone, see the following:
For details on supported iPhone devices, see the following:
▪ “Supported AirPlay devices” (p.187)
1
2
– “Setting the use of volume control via AirPlay” (p.133)
Start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the
iPhone.
On the iTunes/iPhone, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the
unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
iOS 10 (example)
iTunes (example)
82
En
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
Playback of USB storage device contents
3
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
displayed.
NOTE
For details on playable USB devices and USB file formats, see the following:
NOTE
▪ “Supported USB devices” (p.187)
To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN.
▪ “Supported file formats” (p.188)
1
NOTE
▪ You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of contents. For details, see the following:
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
– “Configuring the shuffle setting” (p.99)
– “Configuring the repeat setting” (p.99)
The unit (front)
▪ You can register contents as shortcuts and access them directly. For details, see the following:
YPAO MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
(CONNECT)
USB
5V
1A
– “Registering a favorite content as shortcut” (p.91)
AUX
AUDIO
USB storage device
NOTE
▪ If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load them. In this case,
“Loading…” appears on the front display.
▪ Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnecting it from the USB jack.
▪ Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.
▪ The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.
2
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
NOTE
If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed.
83
En
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/
NAS)
Media sharing setup on media servers (PCs/NAS)
To play back music files stored on your media servers, first you need to configure the
media sharing setting on each music server.
You can play back music files stored on your media server on the unit.
The setting procedure may vary depending on the media server. The following
procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12.
NOTE
▪ You need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server in advance. For details, see the
following:
NOTE
▪ For a media server with software except Windows Media Player installed, refer to the instruction manual
for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings.
– “Media sharing setup on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.84)
▪ The setting procedure may vary depending on the view setting of Windows Media Player or the settings of
PC.
1
2
3
4
5
▪ To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router. You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit. For details, see the
following:
– “Checking the network information on the unit” (p.131)
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
▪ The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.
▪ For details on playable file formats, see the following:
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
– “Supported file formats” (p.188)
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
1
Press NET to select “SERVER” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.
NOTE
If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is
displayed.
Click “OK” to exit.
This completes the settings.
2
NOTE
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
84
En
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
displayed.
NOTE
To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN.
NOTE
▪ You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of contents. For details, see the following:
– “Configuring the shuffle setting” (p.99)
– “Configuring the repeat setting” (p.99)
▪ You can also use the Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the use of a Digital Media Controller” (p.133)
▪ You can register contents as shortcuts and access them directly. For details, see the following:
– “Registering a favorite content as shortcut” (p.91)
85
En
Listening to Internet radio
Selecting an Internet radio station
Registering favorite Internet radio stations
Select an Internet radio station and start playback.
You can register the Internet radio station in playback at present to the “Favorites”
folder.
NOTE
1
2
▪ To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet. You can check whether the network
parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit. For details, see the following:
– “Checking the network information on the unit” (p.131)
▪ You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
▪ The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.
▪ This service may be discontinued without notice.
Press NET to select “NET RADIO” as the input source.
When the registering process finishes, the “Option” menu closes
automatically.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Add to favorites” and press
ENTER.
On the playback screen, the current station is added to the “Favorites”
folder. On the browse screen, the station selected in the list is added to
the “Favorites” folder.
▪ Folder names are different depending on the language.
1
While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION.
NOTE
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
▪ Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “«”.
▪ To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select “Remove from
favorites”.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
▪ You can register Internet radio stations as shortcuts and access them directly. For details, see the
following:
NOTE
To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN.
– “Registering a favorite content as shortcut” (p.91)
86
En
Listening to music streaming services
Listening to a streaming service
You can listen to a streaming service with the MusicCast CONTROLLER on your
mobile device. On the MusicCast CONTROLLER screen, select the room name that
was specified for the unit, and then select the streaming service to be tuned into by its
station name. For details, see the MusicCast CONTROLLER app.
NOTE
▪ Service is limited to certain areas.
▪ Services supported with the unit may not be available depending upon some regions where the unit is
purchased.
▪ Service may change or be discontinued without notice.
▪ After registering the unit in the MusicCast CONTROLLER app, you can use the streaming service. For
details, see the following:
– “Adding the unit to the MusicCast network” (p.48)
▪ To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet. You can check whether the network
parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit. For details, see the following:
– “Checking the network information on the unit” (p.131)
▪ For details on music streaming services, see the supplements for streaming services. Access the Yamaha
Downloads site to download the supplement.
http://download.yamaha.com/
87
En
Useful playback functions
SCENE function
2
MAIN
n Selecting the input source and favorite settings with
To select a desired SCENE name, press ENTER.
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
one touch (SCENE)
1
2
3
5
6
7
TUNER
NET
4
8
INPUT
USB
PRESET
RED
The SCENE function allows you to select the following settings with just one touch.
GREEN
MAIN
MAI
N
BLUETOOTH
YELLOW
BLUE
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTYY
PART
PPURE
URE DIRE
DIRECT
DIR
ECT
HDMI OUT
OUT
• Input source
TOP
MENU
• Registered content
HOME
SCENE
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
BASS
• Sound program
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
STRAIGHT
SCENE
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
• Pure Direct On/Off
• Compressed Music Enhancer On/Off
TUNING
INPUT
• HDMI output jack
NOTE
You can register eight SCENE functions that are assigned to eight SCENE keys on the
remote control respectively.
▪ To cancel the operation of selecting a registered scene, press RETURN.
▪ The operation is canceled automatically when you have not operated the unit for the 30 seconds.
n Selecting a registered scene
Press numbered key (1 to 8), and then the input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are directly selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in
standby mode.
NOTE
To control Zone2, set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”.
Alternatively, you can also select a registered scene by pressing SCENE repeatedly.
1
Press SCENE repeatedly.
The SCENE name appears on the front display and on the TV.
88
En
Zone2
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
Main Zone
SCENE
SCENE
1
2
3
4
SCENE name
Movie Viewing
Radio Listening Music Listening
NET Audio
Listening
Input
HDMI1
TUNER
NET RADIO
HDMI output
HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2
Sound program
Sci-Fi
7ch Stereo
STRAIGHT
7ch Stereo
Pure Direct
Off
Off
Off
Off
Compressed Music
Enhancer
Off
On
Off
On
SCENE
5
AUDIO2
6
7
1
2
3
Input
AV 1
TUNER
AUDIO2
NET RADIO
Volume
-40.0 dB
-40.0 dB
-40.0 dB
-40.0 dB
Tone Control
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
SCENE
5
6
4
7
8
Input
AUDIO3
AUDIO4
AUDIO1
SERVER
Volume
-40.0 dB
-40.0 dB
-40.0 dB
-40.0 dB
Tone Control
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
NOTE
▪ You can also select a registered scene 1 to 4 by pressing SCENE numbered key (1 to 4) on the front
panel.
8
SCENE name
STB Viewing
Game Playing
TV Viewing
Media Server
Listening
Input
HDMI2
HDMI3
AUDIO1
SERVER
HDMI output
HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2
Sound program
Drama
Action Game
Drama
7ch Stereo
Pure Direct
Off
Off
Off
Off
Compressed Music
Enhancer
Off
Off
On
On
▪ For details on the settings, see the following:
– “Selecting items to be included as the scene assignments” (p.126)
89
En
n Registering a scene
2
You can change the default setting and register the function that is assigned to each
numbered key (1 to 8).
Hold down the desired numbered key (1 to 8) until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display or on the TV.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
NOTE
SET Complete
▪ We recommend registering the scene with playing back the content that you want to register.
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
This completes the registers.
▪ To control Zone2, set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”.
1
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
NOTE
Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want
to assign to a scene.
▪ For details on the settings, see the following:
– “Enjoying sound field effects optimized for the type of content” (p.50)
▪ Select an input source
– “Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)” (p.52)
– “Playing back digitally compressed formats with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)” (p.53)
▪ Select the assigned radio station or content (when “NET”, “USB”,
“Bluetooth” or “TUNER” is selected for the input source only)
– “Selecting an HDMI output jack” (p.61)
▪ You can configure more detailed scene assignments in “Scene” in the “Setup” menu. For details, see the
following:
▪ Select a sound Program, straight decode or Pure Direct
– “Selecting items to be included as the scene assignments” (p.126)
▪ Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
▪ You can change the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV. For details, see the
following:
▪ Select an HDMI output jack
– “Renaming the SCENE name” (p.127)
90
En
Shortcut function
2
Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.
MAIN
n Registering a favorite content as shortcut
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
You can register favorite Bluetooth, USB, media server and network content as
shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers.
1
2
3
5
6
7
TUNER
NET
4
8
INPUT
ENHAN
ENHA
ENHANCER
NCER
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
UR. DECODE
DECOD
DEC
ODEE
PROG
PR
PROGRAM
OGRA
RAM
M SSUR.
NOTE
▪ You can register up to 40 contents as shortcuts.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
▪ You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations. For details, see the following:
VOLUME
STRAIGHT
BASS
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
MEMORY
– “Registering favorite Internet radio stations” (p.86)
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
▪ The unit registers Bluetooth or AirPlay as an input source. No individual content can be registered.
1
VOLUME
V
VOL
VO
OLUME
OLUME
LUME
BASS
BASS
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
BAN
BAND
AND
D
TUNIN
TUNING
NINGG
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
01:Empty
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Shortcut number (flashes)
“MEMORY” appears on the front display and the shortcut number to
which the item will be registered blinks.
NOTE
To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET to select the
shortcut number after step 2.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
02:Empty
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
3
Press MEMORY.
The registered shortcut number and “Memorized” appear on the front
display.
This completes the registers.
91
En
n Recalling a registered content as shortcut
NOTE
Recall a registered content (Bluetooth, USB, media server and network content) by
selecting the shortcut number.
▪ The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
▪ “No Presets” appears on the front display when no items are registered.
– A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to this unit.
– A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network.
NOTE
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
You can register up to 40 contents as shortcuts.
1
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
Press BLUETOOTH, NET or USB.
MAIN
▪ When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a media server (PC/NAS), this
unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted
any music files to or from the folder, this unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such
cases, register the items again.
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
USB
5
6
7
8
▪ The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list and easily
removed by using MusicCast CONTROLLER on your mobile device. For details, see the
following:
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
INPUT
TOP
MENU
TUNER
NET
RED
RE
D
GGREEN
GREE
REEEN
RE
USB
BLUETOOTH
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
PRESET
NET
USB
BLUETOOTH
– “Using MusicCast CONTROLLER” (p.48)
VOLUME
BASS
YEL
YELLOW
ELLLOW
BLUE
BLUE
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
2
BAND
TUNING
Press PRESET to select a desired content.
MAIN
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
USB
BLUETOOTH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
INPUT
TOP
MENU
HOME
USB
BLUETOOTH
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
PRESET
PRESET
VOLUME
BASS
RED
RE
D
STRAIGHT
GGREEN
GREE
REEEN
RE
YEL
YELLOW
ELLLOW
BLUE
BLUE
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
01:USB
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Playback of the selected content starts.
92
En
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
Basic operation of the Option menu
3
4
Perform the following basic procedure to operate the “Option” menu. With the “Option”
menu, you can configure different playback settings according to the input source
currently being played back.
1
MAIN
For details on the default settings, see the following:
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PURE DIRECT
▪ “Default settings of the Option menu” (p.198)
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
USB
BLUETOOTH
OPTION
PRESET
TOP
MENU
YELLOW
HOME
BLUE
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
BASS
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
/
/MENU
HOME
R
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
STEREO
M TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
ECO
Tone Control
Front display
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
SS
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
T
Y
G
G
TV screen
2
Press OPTION.
This completes the settings.
NOTE
Press OPTION.
PARTY
Use the cursor keys to select a setting.
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
93
En
Option menu items
Item
Shuffle /
Repeat
(Shuffle /
Repeat)
Use the following table to configure playback settings of the unit.
NOTE
FM Mode (FM
Mode)
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
▪ When the input icon is displayed on the upper right of the “Option” menu, the setting is applied to the
currently selected input source. Otherwise, the setting is applied to all of the input sources.
▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
▪ Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available.
Item
Function
Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and lowfrequency range individually.
p.95
Enables/disables YPAO Volume.
p.95
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted to the volume.
p.96
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
p.96
DTS Dialogue
Control (DTS
Dialog)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X
contents.
p.96
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds for
the screen position.
p.97
Lipsync
(Lipsync)
Lipsync
(Lipsync)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output
manually.
p.97
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
p.97
YPAO Volume
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
(YPAO
Adaptive DRC
Volume)
(A.DRC)
Dialogue
(Dialog)
Input Trim
Corrects volume differences between input sources.
(In.Trim)
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim) Subwoofer Trim
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
(SW.Trim)
Preset (Preset)
Function
p.99
Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting.
p.99
FM Mode (Mode)
Switches between “Stereo” and “Monaural” for FM
radio reception.
p.100
FM Auto Preset
(AUTO)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong
signals as presets.
p.100
Clear Preset
(CLEAR)
Clears radio stations registered to preset numbers.
p.101
Clear All Preset Clears all the radio stations registered to preset
(CLEAR ALL)
numbers.
Page
Adds your favorite Internet radio station to the
“Favorites” folder.
p.102
Remove from favorites
(RemovefromFav.)
Removes it from the “Favorites” folder.
p.102
p.98
Video
Processing
(Video
Process.)
Video Mode
(V.M)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
p.99
Video Out
(Video Out)
Video Out
(V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the selected audio
source.
p.99
Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
p.102
(U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models only)
Checks reception strength of each DAB channel
label.
p.103
On-screen Information
Displays the current status information.
p.103
p.98
Enables/disables Extra Bass.
(U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models only)
Tune AID (Tune AID)
p.98
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
p.101
Add to favorites (Add to Fav.)
Init Scan (Init Scan)
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Page
Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting.
94
En
Adjusting the tone of the audio output
Configuring the volume automatically based on the
YPAO measurement results
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
individually.
n Adjusting the high- and low-frequency levels
Option menu
“Tone Control”
automatically according to the volume
Choices
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and lowfrequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can
enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. YPAO Volume works effectively after the
YPAO measurement. For details, see the following:
Treble, Bass
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
• “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)
NOTE
Option menu
▪ When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.
“YPAO Volume” > “YPAO Volume”
▪ You can also adjust the tone with the front panel controls. Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or
“Bass”, then press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
Settings
▪ If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
Off
Disables YPAO Volume.
On
Enables YPAO Volume.
NOTE
We recommend enabling both “YPAO Volume” and “Adaptive DRC” when you are listening at lower volumes
or at night. For details on “Adaptive DRC”, see the following:
▪ “Adjusting the dynamic range automatically” (p.96)
95
En
n Adjusting the dynamic range automatically
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
to the volume when “YPAO Volume” is set to “On”. When “Adaptive DRC” is set to
“On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night.
Adjusting the volume or perceive height of dialogue
sounds
Option menu
n Adjusting the volume of dialogue sound
“YPAO Volume” > “Adaptive DRC”
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds that are hardly heard.
Settings
Option menu
Off
The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
“Dialogue” > “Dialogue Level”
Setting range
0 to 3 (higher to strengthen)
NOTE
NOTE
We recommend enabling both “YPAO Volume” and “Adaptive DRC” when you are listening at lower volumes
or at night. For details on “YPAO Volume”, see the following:
This setting is not available when one of the following conditions is met.
▪ Dolby Atmos content or DTS:X content is played back.
▪ “Adjusting the high- and low-frequency levels automatically according to the volume” (p.95)
▪ The Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder is working.
n Adjusting the volume of dialogue sound during DTS:X™
playback
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds that are hardly heard for DTS:X content.
Option menu
“Dialogue” > “DTS Dialogue Control”
Setting range
0 to 6 (higher to strengthen)
NOTE
This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played
back.
96
En
n Adjusting the perceived height of dialogue sound
Adjusting the delay of the Lipsync function
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds when the position (height) of dialogue
sound is artificial. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the screen, you
can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Delay Enable” in
the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable”.
NOTE
Option menu
“Lipsync” > “Lipsync”
This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
Setting range
▪ One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence speakers
are used.
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
▪ Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
NOTE
For details on “Delay Enable” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
Option menu
▪ “Enabling Lipsync adjustment” (p.116)
“Dialogue” > “Dialogue Lift”
Setting Compressed Music Enhancer
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Option menu
“Enhancer” > “Enhancer”
Ideal position
Settings
Off
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
NOTE
▪ This setting is applied separately to each input source.
▪ You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer.
▪ For details on Compressed Music Enhancer, see the following:
– “Playing back digitally compressed formats with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)” (p.53)
97
En
Correcting volume differences during playback
Setting the use of Extra Bass
n Correcting volume differences between input sources
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced
bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or
absence of the subwoofer.
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Option menu
Option menu
“Extra Bass” > “Extra Bass”
“Volume Trim” > “Input Trim”
Settings
Setting range
Off
Disables Extra Bass.
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
On
Enables Extra Bass.
NOTE
NOTE
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
You can also use BASS on the remote control to enable/disable Extra Bass.
n Adjusting the subwoofer volume
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Option menu
“Volume Trim” > “Subwoofer Trim”
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
98
En
Enabling the video signal processing
Configuring the shuffle/repeat setting
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings
configured in “Resolution” and “Aspect” in the “Setup” menu. For details, see the
following:
n Configuring the shuffle setting
Configure the shuffle setting for playback.
• “Setting a resolution to output HDMI video signals” (p.128)
Option menu
• “Setting an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals” (p.129)
“Shuffle / Repeat” > “Shuffle”
Option menu
Settings
“Video Processing” > “Video Mode”
Settings
Direct
Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
Off
Turns off the shuffle function.
On
Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order.
NOTE
This setting is available only when “USB” or “SERVER” is selected as the input source.
Selecting a video source to be output with the
selected audio source
n Configuring the repeat setting
Configure the repeat setting for playback.
Selects a video source to be output together with the selected audio source. For
example, you can watch the video from a different source while listening to the radio.
Option menu
“Shuffle / Repeat” > “Repeat”
Option menu
Settings
“Video Out” > “Video Out”
Input sources
AUX, AUDIO 1-5, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), AirPlay, MusicCast Link,
SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB
Off
Turns off the repeat function.
One
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
All
Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly.
NOTE
Settings
Off
Does not output video.
HDMI 1-5, AV 1-2
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
This setting is available only when “USB” or “SERVER” is selected as the input source.
99
En
Switching between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
Switch between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
2
3
Option menu
“FM Mode” > “FM Mode”
Settings
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
Stereo
Enables stereo for FM radio reception.
Monaural
Enables monaural for FM radio reception.
OUT
2
ECO
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
Preset
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
The preset number from which to start the registration is displayed on the
front display.
Setting presets for radio stations
NOTE
n Registering FM radio stations automatically
To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys or PRESET to
select a preset number.
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.
4
NOTE
▪ You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
▪ To register AM radio stations, see the following:
– “Registering a radio station manually” (p.67)
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
▪ (U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are registered automatically by the Auto Preset function.
01:FM 87.50MHz
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Preset number from which to start the registration
Option menu
“Preset” > “FM Auto Preset”
The Auto Preset process starts and “SEARCH” appears during Auto
Preset.
NOTE
To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears on the front display and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
LINK MASTER
OUT
ECO
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
Auto Preset
100
En
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
n Clearing preset stations
n Clearing all preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
Option menu
Option menu
“Preset” > “Clear Preset”
“Preset” > “Clear All Preset”
1
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently
selected is displayed on the front display.
2
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
Preset
4
5
2
3
4
5
Press OPTION.
LINK MASTER
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR”.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
01:FM 98.50MHz
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
Preset station to be cleared
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use
preset number is displayed.
01:Cleared
6
7
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR ALL”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared and
press ENTER.
ECO
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared.
Press OPTION.
This completes the clearing preset stations.
101
En
Performing an initial scan for DAB radio reception
Adding an Internet radio station to the “Favorites”
folder
(U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models only)
Register the currently playing Internet radio station to the “Favorites” folder.
Perform an initial scan for searching DAB radio stations.
Option menu
Option menu
“Init Scan”
“Add to favorites”
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Add to favorites” and press
ENTER.
When the registering process finishes, the “Option” menu closes
automatically.
Removing an Internet radio station from the
“Favorites” folder
Option menu
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Init Scan” and press ENTER.
Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
NOTE
“Remove from favorites”
2
3
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the first
DAB radio station as stored in station order.
Remove an Internet radio station from the “Favorites” folder.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
▪ If you perform an initial scan again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.
Use the cursor keys to select the station to be removed from the
“Favorites” folder.
▪ If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Remove from favorites” and press
ENTER.
When the removing process finishes, the “Option” menu closes
automatically.
102
En
Checking the current status information
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel
label
Displays the current status information as follows.
(U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models only)
Option menu
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label.
“On-screen Information”
1
2
Option menu
“Tune AID”
1
2
3
4
5
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “On-screen Information” and press
ENTER.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Input source/Party
mode status
Press OPTION.
CINEMA DSP status
Volume/YPAO
Volume status
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select the desired DAB channel label.
The reception strength of DAB channel label is displayed in 0 (none) to
100 (best).
6
Press RETURN.
This completes the checking.
Audio format
3
Decoder
Sound mode
To close the information display, press RETURN.
NOTE
▪ You can use the PROGRAM key on the remote control for displaying the status information on the TV. For
details, see the following:
– “Setting the function for the PROGRAM key on the remote control” (p.145)
▪ Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu on the TV.
103
En
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
Basic operation of the Setup menu
2
Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.
Perform the following basic procedure to operate the “Setup” menu. You can configure
the unit’s various functions with the “Setup” menu.
NOTE
▪ If new firmware is available, the message screen appears.
▪ If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen.
▪ For details on firmware updating, see the following:
– “Firmware updates” (p.169)
1
Press SETUP.
MAIN
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
8
3
4
5
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
USB
BLUETOOTH
SETUP
PRESET
TOP
MENU
YELLOW
HOME
BLUE
POP-UP
/MENU
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
BASS
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
/MENU
/
HOME
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
R
NOTE
For details on the default settings, see the following:
M
▪ “Default settings of the Setup menu” (p.198)
SS
T
Y
G
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
G
104
En
Setup menu items
Use the following table to configure various functions of the unit.
Menu
Item
Function
Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
p.109
Selects the size of the front speakers.
p.109
Front
Configuration
Speaker
Page
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
p.110
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.
p.110
Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.
p.111
Front Presence
Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected and their size.
p.112
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.
p.113
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.
p.113
Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
p.113
Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
p.114
Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output.
p.115
Subwoofer
Distance
YPAO Result
Checks and Reloades the previous YPAO adjustments.
p.115
Information
Displays information about the current audio signal.
p.116
Delay Enable
Enables/disables the “Lipsync” adjustment configured in “Auto/Manual Select”.
p.116
Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
p.117
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.
p.117
p.119
Lipsync
Sound
DSP Parameter
DSP Level
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation.
p.119
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field.
p.119
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field.
p.120
Reverb Time
Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound.
p.120
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation.
p.120
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound.
p.120
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation.
p.121
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field.
p.121
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field.
p.121
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.
p.121
Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field.
Surround Back Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field.
105
En
p.122
p.122
Menu
Item
Surround Decoder
7ch Stereo
Sound
Function
Selects a surround decoder to be used.
p.122
Center Spread
Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-channel source is played.
p.123
Center Image
Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field.
p.123
Level
Adjusts the entire volume for “7ch Stereo”.
p.123
p.123
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear volume balance for “7ch Stereo”.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right volume balance for “7ch Stereo”.
p.123
Height Balance
Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers for “7ch Stereo”.
p.124
Enables/disables monaural sound output for “7ch Stereo”.
p.124
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.
p.124
Max Volume
Sets the limit value of the volume.
p.124
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.
p.125
Monaural Mix
Dynamic Range
Volume
Adaptive DSP Level
Virtual Speaker
Scene
VSBS
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level when the volume is adjusted.
p.125
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
p.125
Scene Setting
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments.
p.126
Scene Rename
Renames the scene name displayed on the front display or TV screen.
p.127
Information
Video Mode
Video Mode
Video/HDMI
Page
Decode Type
HDMI Control
Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
p.128
Enables/disables the video signal processing.
p.128
Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals.
p.128
Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals.
p.129
p.129
HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control.
TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input.
p.129
ARC
Enables/disables ARC.
p.129
Standby Sync
Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit.
p.130
HDMI Audio Output
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV.
p.130
HDCP Version
Selects the version of HDCP used on the HDMI input jacks.
p.130
HDMI Standby Through
Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.
p.130
106
En
Menu
Network
Bluetooth
Item
Function
Information
Displays the network information on the unit.
p.131
Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
p.131
IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
p.132
Network Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.
p.132
MAC Address Filter
Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
p.133
MAC Address
Sets the MAC address of the network device that is permitted to access the unit.
p.133
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.
p.133
AirPlay Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay.
p.133
Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
p.134
MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (this unit) also turns on the
power of other devices of the network.
p.134
Bluetooth
Audio Receive
Audio Send
Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions.
p.135
Disconnect
Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit.
p.135
Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby).
p.135
Transmitter
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
p.136
Device Search
Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter.
p.136
Information
Volume
Multi Zone
Page
Zone2
p.137
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
p.137
Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes.
p.137
Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
p.138
Audio Delay
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2.
p.138
Monaural
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
p.138
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output.
p.139
Tone Control
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 output.
p.139
Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output.
p.139
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the volume balance for Zone2 output.
p.139
Zone Rename
Party Mode Set
Displays information about Zone2.
Target : Zone2
Changes the zone name displayed on the TV screen.
p.140
Enables/disables switching to the party mode.
p.140
107
En
Menu
Item
Function
Information
Displays the system information on the unit.
p.141
Language
Selects an on-screen menu language.
p.141
Audio In
Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others.
p.142
Input Skip
Sets which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT key.
p.143
Input Rename
Changes the input source name displayed on the front display.
p.144
Auto Play
Enables/disables Auto Play function in streaming services, Internet radio, media servers (PCs/NAS), Bluetooth and
USB.
p.145
Sets which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key.
p.145
PROGRAM Key
Sets the function for the PROGRAM key on the remote control.
p.145
Color Key
Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control.
p.146
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
p.146
Volume
Switches the scale of the volume display.
p.146
DSP Skip
Remote Key
System
Display Set
Trigger Output
ECO
Page
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.
p.146
Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV screen.
p.146
p.147
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
p.147
Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
p.148
ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).
p.148
Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
p.148
Firmware Update
Updates the firmware via the network.
p.149
108
En
Configuring the speaker settings
Setting your speaker system
Setting the size of the front speakers
Select the setting according to the speakers that are connected.
Selects the setting according to the size of your front speakers.
Setup menu
Setup menu
“Speaker” > “Power Amp Assign”
“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Front”
Settings
Settings
Select this option for small speakers.
Basic
Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using
Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection).
7.1 +1Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers in addition to the 7.1
system in the main zone.
5.1.2 +1Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers in addition to the 5.1.2
system in the main zone.
Large
5.1 BI-Amp
Select this option when you connect speakers that support bi-amp
connections.
NOTE
Small
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Crossover”).
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
▪ When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your
speaker is 16 cm (6‑1/4”) or larger, or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6‑1/4”).
NOTE
For details on the speaker system, see the following:
▪ “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. For details on “Subwoofer” in the
“Setup” menu, see the following:
▪ “Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections” (p.29)
▪ “Connecting Zone2 speakers using the unit’s internal amplifier” (p.55)
– “Setting the use of a subwoofer” (p.113)
109
En
Setting the use of a center speaker and its size
Setting the use of surround speakers and their size
Selects the setting according to the use and size of your center speaker.
Selects the setting according to the use and size of your surround speakers.
Setup menu
Setup menu
“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Center”
“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Surround”
Settings
Settings
Select this option for small speakers.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
Small
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel lowfrequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Select this option for large speakers.
Large
None
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel lowfrequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Select this option for large speakers.
Large
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency
components.
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
None
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
NOTE
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA
DSP works in this case.
NOTE
When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your
speaker is 16 cm (6.1/4”) or larger, or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6.1/4”).
▪ When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your
speaker is 16 cm (6.1/4”) or larger, or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6.1/4”).
▪ For details on Virtual CINEMA DSP, see the following:
– “Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.50)
110
En
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Setting the use of surround back speakers and their
size
Setup menu
Selects the setting according to the use and size of your surround back speakers.
Setting the layout of the surround speakers
“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Surround” > “Layout”
Setup menu
Settings
“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Surround Back”
Settings
Rear
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of
the room.
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of
the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT works in this case.
Select this option for small speakers.
Small
NOTE
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel lowfrequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Select this option for large speakers.
Large
▪ This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the use of surround speakers and their size” (p.110)
▪ For details on Virtual CINEMA FRONT, see the following:
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
None
– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.50)
The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce
surround back channel audio.
NOTE
▪ When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your
speaker is 16 cm (6.1/4”) or larger, or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6.1/4”).
▪ When using surround back speakers, be sure to connect the surround back left and right speakers. Using
only one surround back speaker was discontinued.
▪ “Surround Back” is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to
“Front”. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the use of surround speakers and their size” (p.110)
– “Setting the layout of the surround speakers” (p.111)
111
En
Setting the use of presence speakers and their size
Setting the layout of the presence speakers
Selects the setting according to the use and size of your presence speakers.
Selects a presence layout when presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates
the optimization of the sound field effect.
Setup menu
Setup menu
“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Front Presence”
“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Front Presence” > “Layout”
Settings
Settings
Select this option for small speakers.
Small
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce presence channel lowfrequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Select this option for large speakers.
Large
None
The presence speakers will produce all of the presence channel
frequency components.
Front Height
Select this option when presence speakers are installed on the front wall.
Overhead
Select this option when presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers.
NOTE
Select this option when no presence speakers are connected.
▪ This setting is not available when “Front Presence” is set to “None”. For details on “Front Presence” in the
“Setup” menu, see the following:
The front speakers will produce presence channel audio.
– “Setting the use of presence speakers and their size” (p.112)
NOTE
▪ For details on the layouts of the presence speakers, see the following:
When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your
speaker is 16 cm (6.1/4”) or larger, or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6.1/4”).
– “Presence speaker layout” (p.182)
Setting the crossover frequency of the low-frequency
components
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a
speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value
will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.
Setup menu
“Speaker” > “Configuration” > (speaker) > “Crossover”
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
NOTE
If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
112
En
Setting the distance between each speaker and the
listening position
Setting the use of a subwoofer
Selects the setting according to the use of your subwoofer.
Setup menu
Sets the distance between each speaker and the listening position so that sounds from
the speakers reach the listening position at the same time.
“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Subwoofer”
Setup menu
Settings
“Speaker” > “Distance”
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected.
Use
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected.
None
The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
Setting the phase of the subwoofer
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Presence L, Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
NOTE
Select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet” in “Unit”.
Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch
the subwoofer phase.
Adjusting the volume of each speaker
Setup menu
Adjusts the volume of each speaker to suit your listening position.
“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Subwoofer” > “Phase”
Setup menu
Settings
Normal
Does not reverse the subwoofer phase.
Reverse
Reverses the subwoofer phase.
“Speaker” > “Level”
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Presence L, Presence R, Subwoofer
NOTE
This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. For details on “Subwoofer” in the “Setup”
menu, see the following:
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
▪ “Setting the use of a subwoofer” (p.113)
NOTE
Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance while confirming its effect. For details, see the
following:
▪ “Outputting test tones” (p.115)
113
En
Setting the equalizer
4
Selects the type of equalizer to be used and adjusts the tone.
Use the cursor keys to select a center frequency from the 7 preset
bands (4 for subwoofer).
Setup menu
“Speaker” > “Parametric EQ” > “Parametric EQ”
Settings
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
YPAO:Flat
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the
front speakers.
YPAO:Natural
Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through
Does not use the equalizer.
NOTE
5
“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the YPAO measurement results
have already been saved. Press ENTER again to view the YPAO measurement results. For details on the
YPAO, see the following:
▪ “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)
Freq.: Use the cursor keys to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band.
When selecting “Manual”
1
2
3
To fine-adjust the center frequency, Q factor (bandwidth) or gain,
use the cursor keys to select an item.
Q: Use the cursor keys to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected
band.
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
Gain: Use the cursor keys to adjust the gain of the selected band.
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
Setting range
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for
subwoofer)
NOTE
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
▪ To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
▪ To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with the YPAO measurement results to the
“Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
6
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
114
En
Outputting test tones
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Setup menu
“Speaker” > “Test Tone”
Settings
Off
Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
equalizer.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, you can
discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
Setup menu
“Speaker” > “YPAO Result”
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER.
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
NOTE
You can check the previous YPAO adjustments (“Wiring”, “Size”, “Distance”, and “Level”) in “YPAO Result”.
115
En
Configuring the sound settings
Checking the current audio signal information
Enabling Lipsync adjustment
Displays information about the current audio signal.
Enables/disables the “Lipsync” adjustment configured in “Auto/Manual Select” in the
“Setup” menu.
Setup menu
NOTE
“Sound” > “Information”
Format
For details on “Auto/Manual Select” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
Audio format of the input signal
▪ “Setting the adjustment method of the Lipsync function” (p.117)
The number of source channels in the input signal (front/
surround/LFE)
Channel
Input
Output
Setup menu
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front
channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
“Sound” > “Lipsync” > “Delay Enable”
(When DTS:X content is played back)
Disable
Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
For example, “7.1.4” denotes “standard 7.1-channel plus
4 for overhead speaker channels”.
Enable
Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
Settings
NOTE
Sampling
The number of samples per second of the input digital
signal
Dialogue
The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream
signal
Channel
The number of signal output channels (for example,
“5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
speaker channels”) and the speaker terminals from which
signals are output
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
NOTE
▪ Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on
the specifications and settings of the playback device.
▪ Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu.
116
En
Adjusting the delay of the Lipsync function
Setting the adjustment method of the Lipsync
function
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/
Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Selects the method for adjusting the delay between video and audio output.
Setup menu
Setup menu
“Sound” > “Lipsync” > “Auto/Manual Select”
“Sound” > “Lipsync” > “Adjustment”
Settings
Manual
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and
audio output manually.
NOTE
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a
TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via
HDMI.
For details on “Auto/Manual Select” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
▪ “Setting the adjustment method of the Lipsync function” (p.117)
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
NOTE
▪ You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Delay Enable” in the “Setup” menu. For
details, see the following:
– “Enabling Lipsync adjustment” (p.116)
▪ For details on “Adjustment” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
– “Adjusting the delay of the Lipsync function” (p.117)
117
En
MOVIE
Selecting sound programs
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport
broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the
commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the
atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral
delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and
fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes
the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for
greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed
Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic
reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a
wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with
Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts,
as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert
atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a
presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments,
and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio.
Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which
the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left,
right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range,
providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of
the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both
sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The
restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also
maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the
channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening
for long periods.
Selects the sound program to change the settings of the sound program.
NOTE
You can select a sound program by pressing PROGRAM.
Setup menu
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter”
MUSIC
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The
listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are
suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the
left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA
DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
118
En
Mono Movie
Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and
presence sound field generation
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic
movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program
creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the
appropriate reverberation to the original audio.
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation.
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
Adjusting the sound field effect level
Adjusts the sound field effect level. Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Setup menu
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Initial Delay”
Setting range
Setup menu
1 ms to 99 ms
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “DSP Level”
Setting range
NOTE
-6 dB to +3 dB
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
NOTE
Adjusting the broadening effect of the presence
sound field
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field.
Setup menu
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Room Size”
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
NOTE
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
119
En
Adjusting the loss of the presence sound field
Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and
reverberant sound generation
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field.
Setup menu
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. Higher
to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Liveness”
Setting range
Setup menu
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Reverb Delay”
NOTE
Setting range
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
0 ms to 250 ms
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
NOTE
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
Adjusting the decay time of the rear reverberant
sound
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. Higher to enrich the reverberant
sound and lower to have clear sound.
Setup menu
Adjusting the volume of the reverberant sound
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. Higher to strengthen the reverberant
sound, and lower to weaken it.
Setup menu
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Reverb Time”
Setting range
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Reverb Level”
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Setting range
0 % to 100 %
NOTE
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
NOTE
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
120
En
Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and
surround sound field generation
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field.
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation.
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Liveness”
Adjusting the loss of the surround sound field
Setup menu
Setup menu
Setting range
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Initial Delay”
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
Setting range
NOTE
1 ms to 49 ms
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
NOTE
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and
surround back sound field generation
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Adjusting the broadening effect of the surround
sound field
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field.
Setup menu
Setup menu
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Back Initial Delay”
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Room Size”
Setting range
Setting range
1 ms to 49 ms
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
NOTE
NOTE
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
121
En
Settings
Adjusting the broadening effect of the surround
back sound field
Auto
Uses the decoder automatically selected by input source. The DTS
Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS sources and the Dolby Surround
decoder is selected for other sources.
bDsur
Dolby Surround decoder. Expands the sound using a method optimized
for the layout of the installed speakers. It produces the extended
surround sound optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic
space (including overhead) will be created especially when objectbased audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is played.
Neural:X
DTS Neural:X decoder. Expands the sound using a method optimized
for the layout of the installed speakers. It produces the extended
surround sound optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic
space (including overhead) will be created especially when objectbased audio (such as DTS:X content) is played.
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for
movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back
speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for
music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back
speakers.
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field.
Setup menu
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Back Room Size”
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
NOTE
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Adjusting the loss of the surround back sound field
Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field.
Setup menu
“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Back Liveness”
NOTE
Setting range
▪ For details on each decoder, see the following:
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
– “Glossary of audio decoding format” (p.184)
▪ You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “Surround Decoder” in the “Setup” menu. For details,
see the following:
NOTE
▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
– “Adjusting the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field” (p.123)
▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
– “Setting the use of Center Spread” (p.123)
▪ The selected surround decoder may not work for some input sources.
Selecting the surround decoder used in the program
▪ We recommend Dolby Surround while network streaming is Dolby contents.
▪ The Neural:X decoder does not work for Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD signals. Select “Auto” or
“bDsur” for these signals.
Selects a surround decoder to be used.
▪ When the Dolby Surround decoder or the Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) does not work. For details, see the following:
Setup menu
“Sound” > “Surround Decoder” > “Decode Type”
– “Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.50)
– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.50)
122
En
Setting the use of Center Spread
Adjusting the entire volume for “7ch Stereo”
Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when a 2channel source is played. This setting is effective when “bDsur” is selected.
Adjusts the entire volume. This setting is effective when “7ch Stereo” is selected.
Setup menu
“Sound” > “7ch Stereo” > “Level”
“Sound” > “Surround Decoder” > “Center Spread”
Setting range
Settings
-5 to +5
Off
Disables Center Spread.
On
Enables Center Spread.
Setup menu
Adjusting the front and rear volume balance for “7ch
Stereo”
NOTE
▪ If you feel the center sound is too strong, set this function to “On”.
Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. Higher to enhance the front side, and lower
to enhance the rear side. This setting is effective when “7ch Stereo” is selected.
▪ For details on the surround decoder, see the following:
– “Selecting the surround decoder used in the program” (p.122)
Setup menu
“Sound” > “7ch Stereo” > “Front / Rear Balance”
Adjusting the center localization (broadening effect)
of the front sound field
Setting range
-5 to +5
Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Adjust this
higher to strengthen the center localization (less broadening effect) or lower to weaken
it (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected.
Setup menu
Adjusting the left and right volume balance for “7ch
Stereo”
Adjusts the left and right volume balance. Higher to enhance the right side, and lower
to enhance the left side. This setting is effective when “7ch Stereo” is selected.
“Sound” > “Surround Decoder” > “Center Image”
Setting range
Setup menu
0.0 to 1.0
“Sound” > “7ch Stereo” > “Left / Right Balance”
NOTE
Setting range
For details on the surround decoder, see the following:
-5 to +5
▪ “Selecting the surround decoder used in the program” (p.122)
123
En
Adjusting the height volume balance using the
presence speakers for “7ch Stereo”
Setting the dynamic range adjustment method
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers. Higher to enhance
the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. This setting is effective when “7ch
Stereo” is selected.
“Sound” > “Dynamic Range”
Setup menu
Settings
Setup menu
“Sound” > “7ch Stereo” > “Height Balance”
Setting range
Maximum
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard
Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
0 to 10
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.
Minimum/Auto
NOTE
The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.
Setting the limit value of the volume
Setting the use of Monaural Mix for “7ch Stereo”
Enables/disables monaural sound output. This setting is effective when “7ch Stereo” is
selected.
Setup menu
On
Enables monaural sound output.
Setup menu
Setting range
Settings
Disables monaural sound output.
Sets the limit value of the volume adjusted by using such as VOLUME keys on the
remote control.
“Sound” > “Volume” > “Max Volume”
“Sound” > “7ch Stereo” > “Monaural Mix”
Off
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
-60.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB [20.5 to 95.5 (5.0 increments),
97.0]
NOTE
For details on the scale of the volume display (dB unit or numeric value), see the following:
▪ “Setting the scale of the volume display” (p.146)
124
En
Setting the initial volume for when the unit is turned
on
Setting Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
speakers.
Sets the initial volume when the unit is turned on.
When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are
connected.
Setup menu
“Sound” > “Volume” > “Initial Volume”
Setup menu
Settings
“Sound” > “Virtual Speaker” > “VSBS”
Off
Mute
On
Settings
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last
entered standby mode.
Sets the unit to mute the audio output.
-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
(0.5 dB increments)
[0.5 to 97.0 (0.5
increments)]
Off
Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
On
Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
NOTE
Sets the level to the specified volume level.
▪ VSBS is effective only when 6.1/7.1-channel content is played back.
▪ VSBS, that is working with CINEMA DSP 3D, is not available when the straight decode mode or the direct
playback mode is enabled.
NOTE
▪ This setting works only when the volume level is set lower than “Max Volume”. For details on “Max
Volume” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
– “Setting the limit value of the volume” (p.124)
▪ For details on the scale of the volume display (dB unit or numeric value), see the following:
– “Setting the scale of the volume display” (p.146)
Adjusting the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level
automatically
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level when the
volume is adjusted.
Setup menu
“Sound” > “Adaptive DSP Level”
Settings
Off
Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically.
125
En
Configuring the scene settings
Choices
Selecting items to be included as the scene
assignments
HDMI Control
Control Sync (HDMI Control (p.129))
Input
Input (p.60)
[Input sources: TUNER, (network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO,
Bluetooth, USB]
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
Registered Content
NOTE
[Input sources: others]
The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device,
Bluetooth device, and network device.
---
Setup menu
“Scene” > “Scene Setting”
1
2
Station, Music Content
Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER.
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys
to select an item and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck
the box to exclude).
Check or uncheck
HDMI Output
HDMI Output (p.61)
Mode
DSP Program (p.49), Enhancer (p.97)
Sound
Tone Control (p.95), YPAO Volume (p.95), Adaptive DRC (p.96), Extra
Bass (p.98)
Surround
Dialogue Lift (p.97), Dialogue Level (p.96), Subwoofer Trim (p.98)
Video
Video Mode (p.128)
Volume
Master Volume (p.60)
Lipsync
Lipsync (p.117)
Speaker Setup
PEQ Select (p.114)
Zone Interlock
Power (p.58), Input (p.58), Volume (p.137)
NOTE
To restore the default settings for the selected scene, select “Reset” and press ENTER.
126
En
Renaming the SCENE name
Changes the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV.
Setup menu
“Scene” > “Scene Rename”
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER
to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.
NOTE
▪ To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
▪ To restore the default name, select “RESET”.
3
4
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
127
En
Configuring the video/HDMI settings
Checking the current video and HDMI signal
information
Setting a resolution to output HDMI video signals
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the
HDMI OUT jacks.
NOTE
For details on “Video Mode” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
Setup menu
▪ “Setting the use of the video signal processing” (p.128)
“Video/HDMI” > “Information”
HDMI Signal
Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Video Resolution
Resolutions supported by the TV
Setup menu
“Video/HDMI” > “Video Mode” > “Resolution”
Settings
NOTE
Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu.
Setting the use of the video signal processing
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED
SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV
normally.) For details, see the following:
Setup menu
“Video/HDMI” > “Video Mode” > “Video Mode”
▪ “Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK)” (p.152)
Settings
Processing
Does not convert the resolution.
Auto
NOTE
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Direct
Through
Disables the video signal processing.
Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
NOTE
▪ When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
▪ When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not
displayed on the TV screen.
128
En
Setting an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals
Setting the audio jack used for TV audio input
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
NOTE
For details on “Video Mode” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
NOTE
▪ “Setting the use of the video signal processing” (p.128)
For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
▪ “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.129)
Setup menu
Setup menu
“Video/HDMI” > “Video Mode” > “Aspect”
“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Control” > “TV Audio Input”
Settings
Through
Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of
the screen.
Settings
AV 1–2, AUDIO 1–5
NOTE
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, the input jacks selected here will be used for TV Audio Input.
NOTE
This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or
2160p (4K) signals.
Setting the use of ARC
Setting the use of HDMI Control
Select whether to output TV audio to the speakers connected to the unit when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”.
Enables/disables HDMI Control. HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices
via HDMI.
NOTE
For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
Setup menu
▪ “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.129)
“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Control” > “HDMI Control”
Setup menu
Settings
“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Control” > “ARC”
Off
On
Disables HDMI Control.
Settings
Enables HDMI Control.
Off
Disables ARC.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.
On
Enables ARC.
NOTE
NOTE
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup after connecting HDMI Controlcompatible devices. For details, see the following:
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off”
and use the TV’s speakers.
▪ “HDMI Control and synchronized operations” (p.190)
129
En
Linking the standby modes of the unit and the TV
Setting the version of HDCP used on the HDMI input
jacks
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the unit's standby mode to the TV's power
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Selects the HDCP version of the HDMI input jacks for watching 4K video content.
NOTE
Setup menu
For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
“Video/HDMI” > “HDCP Version”
▪ “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.129)
Input sources
Setup menu
HDMI 1–5
“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Control” > “Standby Sync”
Settings
Settings
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit
is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Auto
Automatically sets the version of HDCP according to content.
1.4
Sets the version of HDCP to always be 1.4.
Setting the use of HDMI Standby Through
Select whether to output video/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode.
Setting the output of HDMI audio from the TV
speaker
NOTE
If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI 1–5) to select an HDMI
input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Enables/disables audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
NOTE
Setup menu
▪ The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Standby Through”
▪ For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
Settings
– “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.129)
Setup menu
Off
Does not output video/audio to the TV.
“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Audio Output” > “HDMI OUT1”/“HDMI OUT2”
Auto
Automatically selects whether to output video/audio depending on the
status of the connected device.
On
Outputs video/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” or “Auto” is selected.)
Settings
Off
Disables audio output from the TV.
On
Enables audio output from the TV.
NOTE
▪ “Off” is not selectable when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
▪ For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
– “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.129)
130
En
Configuring the network settings
Checking the network information on the unit
Displays the network information on the unit.
Setting the network connection method (Wired/
Wireless)
Setup menu
Selects the network connection method.
“Network” > “Information”
Setup menu
IP Address
IP address
“Network” > “Network Connection”
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask
Choices
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P)
The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S)
The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with
a commercially-available network cable.
Wireless(Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point).
MAC address
Network Name
Network name (the unit’s name on the network)
MusicCast Network
The status of the MusicCast network connection.
Wired/Wireless
The status of the wired or wireless connection
SSID
Wired
NOTE
For details on the network connection, see the following:
▪ “Preparing for connecting to a network” (p.36)
Setting the network parameters automatically
(DHCP)
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
NOTE
Set the network parameters (such as IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway)
automatically using a DHCP server.
Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu.
Setup menu
“Network” > “IP Address” > “DHCP”
Settings
131
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters
(such as IP address).
En
Setting the network parameters manually
Setting the use of the Network Standby function
Set the network parameters (such as IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway)
manually.
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Setup menu
Setup menu
“Network” > “IP Address”
“Network” > “Network Standby”
1
2
3
5
6
7
Off
Use the cursor keys to select “IP Address” and press ENTER.
On
Use the cursor keys to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
IP Address
4
Settings
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Specifies an IP address.
Disables the network standby function.
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Enables the network standby function.
Auto
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power
saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
Subnet Mask
Specifies a subnet mask.
NOTE
Default Gateway
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
If you set “Network Standby” to “Off”, “Bluetooth Standby” will be disabled.
DNS Server (P)
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S)
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power
consumption of not more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.
Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a
value.
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
To set another parameter, repeat steps 3 to 5.
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
132
En
Setting the MAC address filter
Setting the use of a Digital Media Controller
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. A Digital
Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the
network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from
DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network.
NOTE
▪ Operation of the AirPlay function or the DMC is not limited by this setting.
▪ You can specify up to 10 network devices that are permitted to access the unit. For details, see the
following:
Setup menu
“Network” > “DMC Control”
– “Setting the MAC address” (p.133)
Setup menu
Settings
“Network” > “MAC Address Filter” > “Filter”
Disable
Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Settings
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
Off
Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. Specify the MAC addresses of the
network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.
Setting the use of volume control via AirPlay
Enables/disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay. When other than “Off”
is set, you can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPhone during playback.
Setting the MAC address
Setup menu
“Network” > “AirPlay Volume Interlock”
Sets the MAC address of the network device that is permitted to access the unit. You
can specify up to 10 network devices.
Settings
Setup menu
“Network” > “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC Address”
1
2
3
4
5
Use the cursor keys to select an MAC address number and press
ENTER.
Off
Disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone.
Limited
Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).
Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a
value.
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
To specify another MAC address, repeat steps 1 to 3.
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
133
En
Setting the network name of the unit
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
Setup menu
“Network” > “Network Name”
1
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to edit the name.
NOTE
▪ To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
▪ To restore the default name, select “RESET”.
3
4
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
Setting the power interlock from the unit to
MusicCast compatible devices
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network
(this unit) also turns on the power of other devices of the network.
Setup menu
“Network” > “MusicCast Link Power Interlock”
Settings
Off
Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
On
Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
134
En
Configuring the Bluetooth® settings
Setting the use of Bluetooth®
Setting the use of the Bluetooth® Standby function
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function.
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth
devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns
on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Setup menu
“Bluetooth” > “Bluetooth”
Setup menu
Settings
“Bluetooth” > “Audio Receive” > “Bluetooth Standby”
Off
Disables the Bluetooth function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth function.
Settings
Terminating the connection between a Bluetooth®
device and the unit
Off
Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
NOTE
This setting is not available when “Network Standby” is set to “Off”. For details, see the following:
Terminates the Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as a
smartphone) and the unit.
▪ “Setting the use of the Network Standby function” (p.132)
Setup menu
“Bluetooth” > “Audio Receive” > “Disconnect”
Select “Disconnect” and press ENTER to terminate the Bluetooth connection.
NOTE
This setting is not available when no Bluetooth devices are connected.
135
En
Setting the use of audio transmission to a Bluetooth®
device
Connecting the unit to a Bluetooth® device that
receives transmitted audio
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Establishes a connection between the unit and Bluetooth devices that receive audio
transmitted from the unit, such as speakers and headphones, when "Transmitter" is set
to "On" in the "Setup" menu.
Setup menu
NOTE
“Bluetooth” > “Audio Send” > “Transmitter”
For details on “Transmitter” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
▪ “Setting the use of audio transmission to a Bluetooth® device” (p.136)
Settings
Off
Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
Setup menu
“Bluetooth” > “Audio Send” > “Device Search”
1
NOTE
For details on connecting Bluetooth devices to which audio is transmitted (speakers, headphones, etc.), see
the following:
Press ENTER.
A list of Bluetooth devices that can connect to the unit is displayed.
2
▪ “Connecting the unit to a Bluetooth device that receives transmitted audio” (p.136)
®
3
4
Use the cursor keys to display the desired Bluetooth speakers/
headphones and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the Bluetooth speakers/
headphones to be connected with the unit.
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” is displayed.
5
Press ENTER.
This completes the settings.
NOTE
▪ If the desired Bluetooth device is not displayed on the list, set the Bluetooth device to pairing mode and
then perform “Device Search” operation again.
▪ To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform a disconnect operation on the Bluetooth speakers/
headphones.
136
En
Configuring the multi zone settings
Checking the Zone2 information
Setting the Zone2 limit value of the volume
Displays information about Zone2.
Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes.
Setup menu
Setup menu
“Multi Zone” > “Information”
“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Max Volume”
On/Off
The power on/off for Zone2
Setting range
Input
The input source selected for Zone2
-60.0 dB to +10.0 dB (5.0 dB increments) [20.5 to 90.5 (5.0 increments)]
Volume
The volume setting for Zone2
NOTE
Tone Control
The tone control setting (the level of Treble and Bass) for Zone2
▪ This setting is not available when “Volume” is set to “Fixed”. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the use of volume adjustments for Zone2 output” (p.137)
NOTE
▪ For details on the scale of the volume display (dB unit or numeric value), see the following:
Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu.
– “Setting the scale of the volume display” (p.146)
Setting the use of volume adjustments for Zone2
output
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable
volume adjustments for Zone2.
Setup menu
“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Volume”
Settings
Fixed
Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Variable
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
NOTE
“Volume” is automatically set to “Variable” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “7.1 +1Zone” or “5.1.2
+1Zone”. For details on “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
▪ “Setting your speaker system” (p.109)
137
En
Setting the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is
turned on
Adjusting the time deviation in relation to the main
zone
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Adjusts the time deviation in relation to the main zone.
Setup menu
Setup menu
“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Initial Volume”
“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Audio Delay”
Settings
Setting range
Mute
On
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last
entered standby mode.
Off
-80.0 dB to +10.0 dB
(0.5 dB increments)
[0.5 to 90.5 (0.5
increments)]
Switching between stereo and monaural for Zone2
output
Sets the unit to mute the audio output.
Sets the level to the specified volume level.
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
Setup menu
NOTE
“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Monaural”
▪ This setting is not available when “Volume” is set to “Fixed”. For details, see the following:
Settings
– “Setting the use of volume adjustments for Zone2 output” (p.137)
▪ This setting works only when the volume level is set lower than “Max Volume” in “Zone2”. For details, see
the following:
– “Setting the Zone2 limit value of the volume” (p.137)
Off
Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.
On
Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.
▪ For details on the scale of the volume display (dB unit or numeric value), see the following:
– “Setting the scale of the volume display” (p.146)
138
En
Setting the use of Compressed Music Enhancer for
Zone2 output
Setting the use of Extra Bass for Zone2 output
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can
enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers.
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output.
Setup menu
Setup menu
“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Extra Bass”
“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Enhancer”
Settings
Settings
Off
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Off
Disables Extra Bass.
On
Enables Extra Bass.
Adjusting the volume balance for Zone2 output
Adjusting the tone for Zone2 output
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for
Zone2 output.
Setup menu
Adjusts the volume balance for Zone2 output. Higher to enhance the right side, and
lower to enhance the left side.
Setup menu
“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Left / Right Balance”
“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Tone Control”
Setting range
Choices
-20 to +20
Treble, Bass
Settings
Auto
Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
range (Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with
correction for the auditory response of the human ear.
Manual
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
range (Bass) manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
Bypass
Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and lowfrequency range (Bass).
139
En
Changes the zone name displayed on the TV screen.
Setting the use of switching to the party mode on
Zone2
Setup menu
Enables/disables switching to the party mode.
Renaming the zone name
“Multi Zone” > “Zone Rename”
1
Setup menu
“Multi Zone” > “Party Mode Set” > “Target : Zone2”
Use the cursor keys to select a zone name to be renamed and
press ENTER.
Settings
The cursor moves to the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.
Disable
Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode
by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
NOTE
For details on party mode, see the following:
▪ “Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode)” (p.59)
NOTE
▪ To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
▪ To restore the default name, select “RESET”.
3
4
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
140
En
Configuring the system settings
Checking the system information on the unit
Setting the on-screen menu language
Displays the system information on the unit.
Select the on-screen menu language.
Setup menu
Setup menu
“System” > “Information”
“System” > “Language”
Remote ID
The unit’s remote control ID setting
Settings
TV Format
The unit’s video signal type
English
English
Speaker Impedance
The speaker impedance setting of the unit
日本語
Japanese
(Asia model only)
Français
French
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit
Deutsch
German
System ID
System ID number
Español
Spanish
Firmware Version
The version of firmware installed on the unit
Русский
Russian
NOTE
Italiano
Italian
Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu.
中文
Chinese
Tuner Frequency Step
NOTE
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
141
En
Necessary setting
Combining audio of another input source with video
of the current input source
For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
and AV 2 (AUDIO) jack of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.
Select the audio of a different input source to play back together with the video of the
currently selected input source. For example, use this function in the following cases.
Video output
(component video)
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI
audio output
COMPONENT
VIDEO
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT
12V 0.1A
Setup menu
HDMI OUT
( HDCP2.2 )
IN
2
“System” > “Audio In”
1
OUT
1
ARC
2
PR
AV 1 (COMPONENT
VIDEO) jacks
PR
(1 MOVIE)
ANTENNA
AUDIO 1
Input sources
PR
( 2 RADIO )
( 7 TV )
FM
OPTICAL
PB
AUDIO 2
HDMI 1-5, AV 1-2
PB
OPTICAL
Settings
COAXIAL
AV 1
Y
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
PR
PB
AUDIO
ZONE OUT
AUDIO 4
PHONO
GND
AV 1-2, AUDIO 1-5
AUDIO 5
ZONE 2
L
L
L
R
Video/audio input jacks available on the unit
Output jacks on video device
Video
Audio
Digital coaxial
AV 2 (AUDIO) jacks
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Digital optical
Analog stereo
Digital optical
Composite video
Digital coaxial
Audio
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 2 (OPTICAL)
HDMI 1-5
AV 1 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
AV 2 (AUDIO)
Analog stereo
Component video
R
Set-top box
R
Digital optical
HDMI
Y
PR
AUDIO 3
COAXIAL
Y
AM
( 3 MUSIC )
Y
PB
PB
REMOTE
AUDIO 4-5
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
AV1
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
AUDIO 2 (OPTICAL)
AV 2 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 4-5 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
AV2
(COMPOSITE VIDEO)
AUDIO 2 (OPTICAL)
AV 1 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
142
En
Audio output
(analog stereo)
1
2
Press INPUT to select “AV 1” (video input jack to be used) as the
input source.
Setting input sources to be skipped when operating
the INPUT key
Press SETUP.
Set which input sources are skipped when operating the INPUT key.
MAIN
You can select the desired input source quickly by using this function.
ZONE 2
SLEEP
PARTY
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
Setup menu
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
“System” > “Input Skip”
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
USB
SETUP
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
YELLOW
Input sources
BLUE
HDMI 1-5, AV 1-2, AUX, AUDIO 1-5, PHONO, TUNER, NET, Bluetooth, USB
Cursor keys
TOP
MENU
HOME
ENTER
POP-UP
/MENU
Settings
ENHANCER
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
BASS
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
/
/MEN
/MENU
Off
Does not skip the selected input source.
On
Skips the selected input source.
NOTE
3
4
5
6
When using AV CONTROLLER, you cannot select the input sources set to “On” in this function.
Use the cursor keys to select “System” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “AV 1” and then select “AV 2”
(audio input jack to be used).
Press SETUP.
This completes the necessary settings.
143
En
Automatically changing the input source names
displayed on the front display
Manually changing the input source names
displayed on the front display
Automatically changes the input source names displayed on the front display. You can
select a name created by the Auto Rename function.
Allows the input source names displayed on the front display to be set manually.
Setup menu
“System” > “Input Rename”
“System” > “Input Rename”
Input sources
Input sources
HDMI 1-5, AV 1-2, AUX, AUDIO 1-5, PHONO, TUNER, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET
RADIO, Bluetooth, USB
HDMI 1-5, AV 1, AUDIO 1-3
1
2
3
4
Setup menu
1
Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.
Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.
NOTE
Use the cursor keys to select “Auto”.
If the input source is set to “Auto”, use the cursor keys to select “Manual”.
2
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 2.
Press ENTER.
The cursor moves to the name edit screen.
Press SETUP.
3
This completes the settings.
NOTE
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to edit the name.
NOTE
When “Auto” is selected, the created name is saved even after the external device is disconnected. To reset
to the default setting, switch the setting to “Manual” and then back to “Auto”.
▪ To cancel the entry, select “CLEAR”.
▪ To restore the default name, select “RESET”.
4
5
6
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 4.
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
144
En
Setting the use of Auto Play function
Enables/disables Auto Play function in Internet streaming services and following input
sources.
Setup menu
Setting the function for the PROGRAM key on the
remote control
Sets the function that is assigned to the PROGRAM key on the remote control. You can
use the PROGRAM key for other than DSP program selection.
“System” > “Auto Play”
Setup menu
Input sources
“System” > “Remote Key” > “PROGRAM Key”
(network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Settings
Assign1
Off
Disables Auto Play function.
On
Starts automatically to play back the last content which you played back.
Auto
Starts automatically to play back the content which only you played back
at setting the unit to standby mode.
Enables selecting the DSP Programs.
Enables selecting just the DSP Movie/Music Programs.
Assign2
NOTE
In some input sources or content, you might not enable Auto Play function.
Setting sound programs to skip when operating the
PROGRAM key
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Movie Programs
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Music
Programs
Assign3
Enables selecting the NETWORK sources.
Assign4
Enables moving to the previous/next page of the Browse Screen.
Assign5
Enables fine-adjusting the subwoofer volume.
Assign6
Enables adjusting the volume of dialogue sounds.
Enables selecting shuffle/repeat settings.
Assign7
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: repeat
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: shuffle
Set which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key.
Displays the front/on-screen display information.
You can select the desired sound program quickly by using this function.
Assign8
Setup menu
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: front display information
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: on-screen display information
“System” > “DSP Skip”
NOTE
Settings
This setting does not change the function of the PROGRAM key on the front panel.
Off
Does not skip the selected sound program.
On
Skips the selected sound program.
145
En
Setting the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/
YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control
Setting the scale of the volume display
Switches the scale of the volume display.
Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control.
Setup menu
Setup menu
“System” > “Display Set” > “Volume”
“System” > “Remote Key” > “Color Key”
Settings
Settings
dB
Displays the volume in the “dB” unit.
0-97
Displays the volume in the numeric value (0-97).
Default
Assigns the functions of devices connected to the unit with an HDMI
cable.
Setting the use of short messages on the TV
This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Assigns the functions of TV Control to each key.
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment).
RED: EXIT (closes the menu on the TV)
TV Control
GREEN: INFO (displays information about the TV such as the resolution)
YELLOW: BROADCAST (switches the TV broadcast type)
Setup menu
BLUE: INPUT (switches the TV input)
“System” > “Display Set” > “Short Message”
This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
NOTE
Off
Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
▪ For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
On
Displays short messages on the TV screen.
– “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.129)
Setting the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV
▪ To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup after connecting HDMI Controlcompatible devices. For details, see the following:
– “HDMI Control and synchronized operations” (p.190)
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
▪ HDMI Control might not work properly.
Setup menu
Adjusting the brightness of the front display
“System” > “Display Set” > “Wallpaper”
Settings
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setup menu
“System” > “Display Set” > “Dimmer (Front Display)”
Piano
Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
NOTE
The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” is set to “On”. For details, see the following:
▪ “Setting the use of the eco mode” (p.148)
146
En
Specifying the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to
function
Switching the output level for electronic signal
transmission manually
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of
the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Setup menu
“System” > “Trigger Output” > “Trigger Mode”
Setup menu
Settings
Power
Source
Manual
“System” > “Trigger Output” > “Trigger Mode” > “Manual”
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone.”
Settings
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the
zone specified with “Target Zone.”
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source.”
Specifying the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT
jack functions are synchronized
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual.”
NOTE
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
For details on “Target Zone” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
Setup menu
▪ “Specifying the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized” (p.147)
“System” > “Trigger Output” > “Target Zone”
Specifying the output level of the electronic signal
transmitted with each input
Settings
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching
when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Main
Setup menu
Zone2
“System” > “Trigger Output” > “Trigger Mode” > “Source”
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
Choices
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
HDMI 1-5, AV 1-2, AUX, AUDIO 1-5, TUNER, PHONO, (network sources), Bluetooth,
USB, AirPlay, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET RADIO
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
All
Settings
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
NOTE
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
▪ “Specifying the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function” (p.147)
For details on “Trigger Mode” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
147
En
Setting the amount of time for the auto-standby
function
Setting the use of the eco mode
You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting the eco mode to “On”. After
changing the setting, be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.
Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Setup menu
Setup menu
“System” > “ECO” > “Auto Power Standby”
“System” > “ECO” > “ECO Mode”
Settings
Settings
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
5 minutes, 20 minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and
the unit has not detected any input signal for the specified time.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
specified time.
NOTE
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.
Off
Disables the eco mode.
On
Enables the eco mode.
NOTE
▪ When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front display may become dark.
▪ If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Preventing accidental changes to the settings
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Setup menu
“System” > “Memory Guard”
Settings
Off
Does not protect the settings.
On
Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
NOTE
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
148
En
Updating the firmware via the network
Updates the firmware via the network. You can also check the firmware version and
system ID.
Setup menu
“System” > “Firmware Update”
Choices
Firmware Update
Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware.
USB Update
Displays how to update the firmware using a USB memory device in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu.
NOTE
▪ “Firmware Update” is not selectable when firmware update is in preparation.
▪ Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more.
▪ If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update
may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. In this case, wait until firmware update is
ready, or update the firmware using the USB memory device. For details on using the USB memory
device, see the following:
– “Updating the firmware (UPDATE)” (p.154)
149
En
Configuring the advanced settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Basic operation of the ADVANCED SETUP menu
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Perform the following basic procedure to operate the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu while
viewing the front display.
Use the following table to configure system settings of the unit.
1
2
Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
z (power).
STRAIGHT
The top item and its setting of the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu appear on
the front display.
3
4
5
Function
SP IMP.
Changes the speaker impedance setting.
p.151
REMOTE ID
Selects the unit’s remote control ID.
p.151
TU
z (MAIN ZONE)
PROGRAM
Item
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
p.151
TV FORMAT
Switches the video signal type of HDMI output.
p.151
MON.CHK
Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.
p.152
4K MODE
Selects the HDMI 4K signal format.
p.152
DTS MODE
Selects the information to be sent to the BD player connected to
the unit about the DTS formats that the unit supports.
p.153
BKUP/RSTR
Backups and restores all the settings for the unit.
p.153
INIT
Restores the default settings.
p.154
UPDATE
Updates the firmware.
p.154
VERSION
Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
p.154
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
This completes the settings.
NOTE
For details on the default settings, see the following:
▪ “Default settings of the ADVANCED SETUP menu” (p.200)
150
(Asia model only)
Page
En
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)
(Asia model only)
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
SP IMP.••8¬MIN
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
TU••••FM50/AM9
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
ADVANCED SETUP menu
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
“SP IMP.”
ADVANCED SETUP menu
“TU”
Settings
Settings
6 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit.
8 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
REMOTE ID••ID1
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps
and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with
a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
TV FORMAT•NTSC
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
ADVANCED SETUP menu
Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV.
“REMOTE ID”
Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it
is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images
on the TV screen do not appear correctly.
Settings
ID1, ID2
ADVANCED SETUP menu
Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
“TV FORMAT”
• To select ID1, while holding down the left cursor key, hold down SCENE (1) for 5
seconds.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
• To select ID2, while holding down the left cursor key, hold down SCENE (2) for 5
seconds.
151
En
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MON.CHK)
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
4K MODE•MODE 1
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
MON.CHK••••YES
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
ADVANCED SETUP menu
“MON.CHK”
Settings
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
ADVANCED SETUP menu
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different
resolution than the detected resolution.
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and
playback device are connected to the unit.
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
YES
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
“4K MODE”
Settings
MODE 1
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the following table. Depending on the
connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed correctly.
In this case, select “MODE 2”.
MODE 2
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the following table.
NOTE
When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with
Ethernet.
Format
NOTE
MODE 1
▪ For details on “Resolution” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:
8 bit
– “Setting a resolution to output HDMI video signals” (p.128)
▪ Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MON.CHK” has been set to “SKIP”.
4K/60, 50 Hz
4K/30, 25, 24 Hz
152
En
RGB 4:4:4
4
YCbCr 4:4:4
4
MODE 2
10 bit
12 bit
8 bit
10 bit
–
–
–
–
12 bit
YCbCr 4:2:2
4
YCbCr 4:2:0
4
4
–
RGB 4:4:4
4
4
–
YCbCr 4:4:4
4
4
–
YCbCr 4:2:2
4
–
4
Setting DTS Format Notification (DTS MODE)
OUT
ECO
4
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
2
DTS MODE•MODE1
When “Complete” appears on the front display, press z (power)
to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
If “Failed” appears on the front display, check the following and start the
process again.
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
This setting informs the BD player about the DTS formats that the unit supports.
ADVANCED SETUP menu
In case of “BKUP”:
“DTS MODE”
• You cannot overwrite save. When you save the settings repeatedly, please move the
file in different folder.
Settings
MODE 1
MODE 2
• The file is stored by the name of “MC_backup_(model name).dat” in the route of the
USB memory device.
This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.
Use this setting under normal circumstances.
Use this setting if the BD player fails to properly output a DTS signal even
when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.
Backuping and restoring all the settings (BKUP/RSTR)
OUT
2
ECO
BKUP/RSTR•BKUP
• Check that the file is stored in the route of the USB memory device.
NOTE
▪ “RSTR” is effective after backuping all the settings.
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
▪ Do not turn off the unit during the backuping and restoring process. Otherwise, the settings may not be
restored correctly.
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
▪ The user information (such as account, password) is not saved.
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
LINK MASTER
In case of “RSTR”:
Backups and restores all the unit's setting to a USB memory device. Prepare a USB
memory device using FAT16 or FAT32 format in advance.
ADVANCED SETUP menu
“BKUP/RSTR”
Settings
BKUP
Backups all the settings.
RSTR
Restores all the previous backuped settings.
1
2
3
Connect the USB memory device to the USB jack on the front
panel.
To start the process, press STRAIGHT to select “BKUP” or
“RSTR” and then press INFO on the front panel.
Press INFO again after the confirmation message appears on the
front display.
153
En
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
INIT••••CANCEL
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
VERSION••xx.xx
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
ADVANCED SETUP menu
ADVANCED SETUP menu
“INIT”
“VERSION”
Choices
VIDEO
Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL
Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL
Does not perform an initialization.
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
LINK MASTER
OUT
2
ECO
STEREO TUNED ZONE
SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B
Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC
UPDATE•••••USB
VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL
FPL
FPR
SW
SR
SL
SBL SB SBR
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website to a USB memory
device. You can update the firmware using this USB memory device. For details, refer
to the information supplied with updates.
ADVANCED SETUP menu
“UPDATE”
Choices
USB
Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK
Update the firmware via the network.
NOTE
Do not perform this menu unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information
supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
154
En
TROUBLESHOOTING
When any problem appears
n The power does not turn on in synchronization with the
If trouble occurs, first check the following:
TV
Make sure of the following when the unit does not function properly.
• The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players)
are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
• The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned
on.
l HDMI Control on the unit is disabled.
If turning off the unit is not synchronized to the TV either, check the setting of HDMI
Control on the unit. For details on HDMI Control, see the following:
– “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.129)
l HDMI Control on the TV is disabled.
If only turning on the unit is not synchronized to the TV, check the setting on the
TV. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV and set HDMI Control on
the TV.
• The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
If there is no problem with the power and cables, refer to the instructions shown in
“When any problem appears” corresponding to the trouble of the unit.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed or if the instructions do not help, turn
off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha
dealer or service center.
l Because of a power failure, the unit's power is no longer synchronized.
Disconnect the HDMI cables and power cables, and after five minutes, reconnect
the cables of playback devices first, then the unit, and then the TV. Then, check
that the power is synchronized.
Power, system, or remote control trouble
n The power does not turn off
n The power does not turn on
l The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.
If the standby indicator on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power, as a
safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest
Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
155
l The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply
voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the
unit. If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and plug it again.
En
n The power turns off (standby mode) immediately
n The unit is not reacting
l The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers. For details, see the following:
– “Connecting the speaker” (p.19)
l The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply
voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the
unit. If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and plug it again.
n The unit enters standby mode automatically
n The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control
l The sleep timer worked.
Turn on the unit and start playback again.
l The unit is out of the operating range.
Use the remote control within the operating range. For details, see the following:
– “Operating range of the remote control” (p.9)
l The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for the
specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off”. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the amount of time for the auto-standby function” (p.148)
l The batteries are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
l The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. For details, see the following:
– “Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)” (p.151)
l The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong
lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
l The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers. For details, see the following:
– “Connecting the speaker” (p.19)
l The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control. For details, see the
following:
– “Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)” (p.151)
l The remote control is set to the Zone2 operation mode.
Set the remote control to the Main zone operation mode. For details, see the
following:
– “Part names and functions of the remote control” (p.16)
156
En
n Cannot select the desired input source even if “INPUT”
Audio trouble
is pressed
n No sound
l The function which skips some input sources is set.
Set “Input Skip” of the desired input source in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. For
details, see the following:
– “Setting input sources to be skipped when operating the INPUT key” (p.143)
l Another input source is selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. For details, see
the following:
– “Basic procedure for playing back video and music” (p.60)
n The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote
l Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. Ensure that the
signals are types that the unit is able to play back. For details on supported file
formats, HDMI audio formats or compatible decoding format, see the following:
– “Supported file formats” (p.188)
– “Specifications” (p.194)
control do not operate
l The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not support the
operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys.
Use a device which supports the operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE
keys.
l The power of Zone2 is not turned on.
Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE 2”, and then press z (receiver power) to the
power of Zone2 turns on. For details, see the following:
– “Controlling Zone2” (p.58)
l The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's remote
control have been changed.
Set the “Color Key” settings in the “Setup” menu to “Default”. For details, see the
following:
– “Setting the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the
remote control” (p.146)
l The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
n The volume cannot be increased
l The maximum volume is set too low.
Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume. For details,
see the following:
– “Setting the limit value of the volume” (p.124)
l A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
157
En
n No sound is coming from a specific speaker
n No sound is coming from the subwoofer
l The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.
To check it, display information about the current audio signal on the TV. For
details, see the following:
– “Checking the current audio signal information” (p.116)
l The playback source does not contain Low Frequency Effect (LFE) or lowfrequency signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer. For details, see the
following:
– “Setting the use of Extra Bass” (p.98)
l The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu. For details, see the following:
– “Outputting test tones” (p.115)
l Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform YPAO or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”. For details, see
the following:
– “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)
– “Setting the use of a subwoofer” (p.113)
l Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform YPAO or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker
settings. For details, see the following:
– “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)
– “Setting the use of a subwoofer” (p.113)
– “Setting the size of the front speakers” (p.109)
– “Setting the use of a center speaker and its size” (p.110)
– “Setting the use of surround speakers and their size” (p.110)
– “Setting the use of surround back speakers and their size” (p.111)
– “Setting the use of presence speakers and their size” (p.112)
l The volume of the subwoofer is too low.
Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
l The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.
Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
l The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform YPAO or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume.
For details, see the following:
– “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)
– “Adjusting the volume of each speaker” (p.113)
l The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective.
Check the unit’s SPEAKERS terminals and the speaker’s terminals. If there is no
problem with the connection, replace a breaking speaker cable with another
speaker cable.
l The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists with using
another speaker, the unit may be malfunctioning.
158
En
n No sound from the playback device connected to the
n Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio
l The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
l The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only.
To check it, display information about the current audio signal on the TV. If
necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. For
details, see the following:
– “Checking the current audio signal information” (p.116)
unit with HDMI
l The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
n No sound from the playback device when HDMI Control
is used
n Noise/hum is heard
l The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.
Move the unit further away from the device.
l The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is
output from the speakers connected to the unit.
l The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
l TV audio is selected as the input source.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
n The sound is distorted
n No sound from the TV when HDMI Control is used
l The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
l A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI
cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection. For details, see the
following:
– “HDMI connection with a TV” (p.30)
l The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off”. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the use of the eco mode” (p.148)
l A device (such as an external power amplifier) connected to the unit’s audio
output jacks is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s audio output jacks.
l If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable, the TV audio input
setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack.
For details, see the following:
– “Setting the audio jack used for TV audio input” (p.129)
l If you are trying to use ARC, ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, and enable ARC on the TV. For details,
see the following:
– “Setting the use of ARC” (p.129)
159
En
n No image (contents required the HDCP 2.2/2.3 -
Video trouble
compatible HDMI device) from the playback device
n No video
l Another input source is selected on the unit.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
l The TV (HDMI input jack) does not support HDCP 2.2/2.3.
Connect the unit to the TV (HDMI input jack) that supports HDCP 2.2/2.3. (The
Warning message can be displayed on the TV screen.)
l Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
n The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV
l The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about video
signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV.
l Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
l The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
n The video is interrupted
l If you are using two TVs in the Main zone, another TV is turned off when “HDMI
OUT 1+2” is selected.
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are
using. For details on selecting HDMI output, see the following:
– “Selecting an HDMI output jack” (p.61)
n No video from the playback device connected to the
unit with HDMI
l The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution) and video
signals supported by the unit, see the following:
– “Checking the current video and HDMI signal information” (p.128)
– “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.192)
l The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
l The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
160
En
n Radio stations cannot be selected automatically
FM/AM radio trouble (AM radio feature is not
available for the U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia
models)
l Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually. Or use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a
sensitive multi-element antenna. For details on selecting the station manually, see
the following:
– “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.65)
n FM radio reception is weak or noisy
l The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Select the station manually. Use an outdoor AM
antenna. For details on selecting the station manually, see the following:
– “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.65)
l There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
l Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
To select monaural FM radio reception, set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to
“Monaural”. Or use an outdoor FM antenna. For details on “FM Mode”, see the
following:
– “Switching between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception” (p.100)
n AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets
n AM radio reception is weak or noisy
l The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other
electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
161
l Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually. For details, see the following:
– “Registering a radio station manually” (p.67)
En
DAB radio trouble (U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia
models)
n No DAB radio reception
l An initial scan has not been performed.
Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio. For details, see the following:
– “Preparing the DAB tuning” (p.69)
n DAB radio reception is weak or noisy
l There is multi-path interference.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu, and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. For details, see the
following:
– “Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label” (p.74)
l Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
n No DAB radio reception even after performing an initial
scan
l Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu, and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. For details, see the
following:
– “Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label” (p.74)
l There is no DAB coverage in your area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a
listing of the DAB coverage in your area.
162
n DAB information is not available or is inaccurate
l The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may not
provide information.
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
n No DAB radio sound
l The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service.
Try the station later or select another station.
En
USB trouble
Network trouble
n The unit does not detect the USB device
n The network feature does not function
l The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.
Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
n Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed
l The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit. If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the network parameters automatically (DHCP)” (p.131)
– “Setting the network parameters manually” (p.132)
l The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.
Use a USB device without an encryption function.
l The unit does not support IPv6 network.
Connect IPv4 network.
n The unit does not perform continuous playback on files
n The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless
l When the unit detects a series of unsupported files during playback, playback
stops automatically.
Do not save unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) in folders for
playback.
l The wireless router (access point) is turned off.
Turn on the wireless router.
l The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.
Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
of USB device
router (access point)
l The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.
Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
l There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.
l The wireless router (access point) is set to use the wireless channel 14.
Change settings of the wireless router (access point) to use one of the wireless
channels from 1 to 13.
n Wireless network is not found
l Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might
disturb the wireless communication.
Turn off these devices.
l Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless
router (access point).
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
163
En
n The unit does not detect the media server (PC/NAS)
n The Internet radio cannot be played
l The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared. For details, see the following:
– “Media sharing setup on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.84)
l The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
l The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
l Some security software installed on your media server is blocking the access
of the unit to your media server.
Check the settings of security software installed on your media server.
l The unit and media server are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit
and the media server to the same network.
l The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your media server to allow it to access to the unit. For
details, see the following:
– “Setting the MAC address filter” (p.133)
n The files in the media server (PC/NAS) cannot be
viewed or played back
l Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network
devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The
port number varies depending on the radio station.
n The iPhone does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay
l The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPhone to the SSID which can access the unit. (Connect it to
the Primary SSID at the top of the list.)
l The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see the following:
– “Supported file formats” (p.188)
164
En
n The application for mobile devices does not detect the
Bluetooth® trouble
unit
l The unit and mobile device are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit
and mobile device to the same network.
l The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your mobile device to allow it to access to the unit. For
details, see the following:
– “Setting the MAC address filter” (p.133)
l The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPhone to the SSID which can access the unit. (Connect it to
the Primary SSID at the top of the list.)
n A Bluetooth® connection cannot be established
l The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.
Enable the Bluetooth function. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the use of Bluetooth®” (p.135)
l Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection.
For details, see the following:
– “Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit” (p.80)
l The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
l There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs
signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit and the Bluetooth device away from those devices.
n Firmware update via the network is failed
l The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.
Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
l It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.
Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device. For
details, see the following:
– “Updating the firmware via the network” (p.149)
l The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not working
for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again. For details, see the
following:
– “Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit” (p.80)
165
En
n No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted
during playback with Bluetooth® connection
l The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.
Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
l The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.
Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
l The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.
Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again.
For details, see the following:
– “Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit” (p.80)
l The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
l There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs
signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit and the Bluetooth device away from those devices.
166
En
Error indications on the front display
Error indications on the front display
Refer to the following table when the error message is indicated on the front display.
Message
Cause
Remedy
Access denied
Access to the media servers (PCs/NAS) is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared. For
details, see the following:
The unit cannot access the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
• “Media sharing setup on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.84)
Access error
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on, and check the connection between the unit and your
router (or hub). For details, see the following:
• “Connecting a network cable (wired connection)” (p.36)
• “Preparing wireless antennas (wireless connection)” (p.37)
Check SP Wires
The speaker cables are short circuited.
Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. For details, see
the following:
Internal Error
An internal error has occurred.
Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content
There are no playable files in the selected folder.
Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The network cable is not connected.
Connect the network cable properly.
The wireless router (access point) is not found.
Make sure the wireless router (access point) is turned on.
Please wait
The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
• “Connecting the speaker” (p.19)
Not connected
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control. For details, see the following:
• “Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)” (p.151)
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPhone for some Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPhone itself, the song data or storage area may be
reason.
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the media servers
(PCs/NAS) for some reason.
Ensure that the files are types that the unit is able to play back. If the unit supports the file format, but
still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. For information about
the formats supported by the unit, see the following:
USB Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error
Firmware update failed.
Unable to play
• “Supported file formats” (p.188)
Update the firmware again. For details, see the following:
• “Updating the firmware (UPDATE)” (p.154)
• “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.170)
167
En
Message
Cause
Update failed.
Firmware update failed.
FILE NOT READY
Preparation for firmware update is not finish yet.
Remedy
Press STRAIGHT and select a firmware updating method, then press INFO to update the firmware
again. For details, see the following:
• “Updating the firmware (UPDATE)” (p.154)
• “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.170)
Wait a while before updating the firmware again.
168
En
APPENDIX
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Firmware updates
NOTICE
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, new firmware is
downloaded via the network. When a firmware update is ready, the following message
appears after SETUP is pressed.
▪ Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. If the
firmware update is interrupted, there is a possibility that the unit will malfunction. In this case, contact
your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
NOTE
▪ The firmware update indicator on the front display lights up when a firmware update is ready. This
indicator might not light up when the network connection speed is too slow or a later firmware update is
available.
▪ Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more.
▪ You might not get the message or the lighting up firmware update indicator on the front display depending
on the condition of the network connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory
device. For details, see the following:
– “Updating the firmware (UPDATE)” (p.154)
▪ For details on firmware updates, visit the Yamaha website.
For details on the firmware update, see the following:
• “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.170)
169
En
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Confirm the on-screen description displayed after SETUP is pressed, and start the
firmware update.
1
2
Read the on-screen description.
Use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update begins.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the
front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
NOTE
▪ Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more.
▪ You might not get the message or the lighting up firmware update indicator on the front display depending
on the condition of the network connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory
device. For details on using the USB memory device, see the following:
– “Updating the firmware (UPDATE)” (p.154)
▪ For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
▪ If you want to perform update when turning off the unit, use the cursor keys to select “LATER” and press
ENTER in step 2. When you turn off the unit, a screen asking you to confirm the firmware update is
displayed, and press ENTER to start the firmware update. After the firmware update is complete, the unit
will turn off automatically.
▪ To perform update when turning off the unit, refer to the following instructions and supplementary
explanations.
– The firmware update can be started by pressing INFO on the front panel.
– The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update if two minutes pass after the
screen to confirm the firmware update is displayed.
– To cancel the firmware update process, press RETURN, and the unit will turn off.
– The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the unit with AV CONTROLLER
or MusicCast CONTROLLER.
170
En
Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast Surround function)
n Sample speaker layout
Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast
Surround function)
The following is a 5.1.2-channel system using two MusicCast 20 speakers as the
surround speakers and one MusicCast SUB 100 as the subwoofer.
Using devices that support the MusicCast Surround function, you can enjoy a 5.1.2channel or 5.1-channel system with wireless surround speakers and subwoofer.
E
NOTE
▪ For details on the 5.1.2-channel or 5.1-channel system, see the following:
R
1
2
– “Using 5.1.2-channel system” (p.22)
▪ Refer to the instruction manual of the devices that support the MusicCast Surround function for details on
settings and operations.
9
n Devices supporting MusicCast Surround
3
4
5
As of December 1, 2018
Wireless Streaming Speaker
Network Subwoofer
NOTE
▪ In a 5.1.2-channel or 5.1-channel system, the surround speakers and subwoofer can be wireless. With
other systems, only the subwoofer can be wireless.
▪ With wireless surround speakers
MusicCast 50
MusicCast 20
– Sound will not be output from the speaker terminals (SURROUND) on the unit.
MusicCast SUB 100
– Surround back speakers cannot be used.
▪ With a wireless subwoofer
– One subwoofer can be wireless.
– Sound will not be output from the pre-out jacks (SUBWOOFER 1 and 2) on the unit. Therefore, another
subwoofer cannot be used by connecting it with an audio cable.
▪ The following audio cannot be output from the wireless surround speakers and subwoofer.
– DSD audio
– DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD (SACD) from HDMI input
171
En
1
2
The unit and the devices supporting MusicCast Surround must be
registered with the same location on the MusicCast
CONTROLLER app.
Follow the app’s on-screen instructions to complete setup of the
MusicCast Surround function.
Tap the
settings icon.
Tap “MusicCast
Surround/Stereo”.
For detailed setup instructions, refer to the following.
https://download.yamaha.com/files/tcm:39-1212383
3
Adjust the speaker settings automatically (YPAO).
NOTE
For details on YPAO, see the following:
▪ “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)
4
Check the settings.
And then, you can enjoy content playback with the MusicCast
CONTROLLER app.
172
En
Connecting to a network wirelessly
Selecting a wireless network connection method
1
2
Select a wireless connection method according to your network environment.
NOTE
▪ You need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to
configure the network parameters manually. For details, see the following:
3
4
5
– “Setting the network parameters manually” (p.132)
▪ When the unit is added to a MusicCast network, the network settings can be configured at the same time.
If you use MusicCast, this method is recommended. For details, see the following:
– “Adding the unit to the MusicCast network” (p.48)
Internet
Wireless router
6
7
Modem
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the
unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Network Connection” and press
ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Wireless(Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
The following connection methods are available.
• “Setting up a wireless connection using the WPS button” (p.174)
• “Setting up a wireless connection using an iOS device” (p.174)
• “Setting up a wireless connection by selecting from the list of available access
points” (p.176)
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit
• “Setting up a wireless connection manually” (p.177)
• “Setting up a wireless connection by using the WPS PIN code” (p.179)
173
En
Setting up a wireless connection using the WPS
button
Setting up a wireless connection using an iOS device
You can set up a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS
devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button.
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router.
Setup menu
NOTE
“Network” > “Network Connection” > “Wireless(Wi-Fi)”
1
2
3
4
▪ This process will restore the default settings for the following.
– Network settings
Use the cursor keys to select “WPS Button” and press ENTER.
– Bluetooth settings
– Bluetooth, USB, media server and network content registered as shortcuts
Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.
– Internet radio stations registered to “Favorites”
– Account information for the network services
Read the on-screen description and push the WPS button on the
wireless router (access point).
▪ You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example for iOS 10.)
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER.
Setup menu
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front
display.
“Network” > “Network Connection” > “Wireless(Wi-Fi)”
▪ This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In
this case, use other connection method.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection
method.
This completes the network settings.
NOTE
▪ The unit may not connect to the wireless router (access point) using WEP as the encryption method. In
this case, try another connection method.
▪ You can use INFO (WPS) on the front panel. Hold down INFO (WPS) for a few seconds to set up a
wireless connection and then “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display, push the
WPS button.
About WPS
▪ WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
174
En
1
2
3
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and
press ENTER.
Select the network (access point) of which you want to share the
settings with the unit.
Tap here to start setup
Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.
Read the on-screen description and select “NEXT” and then,
press ENTER.
The network currently selected
NOTE
When you use wired network connection, a warning message is displayed on the screen.
Disconnect the network cable from the unit, and then press ENTER.
4
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to
the selected network (access point) and “Completed” appears on the
front display.
On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the WiFi screen.
If “Not shared” or “Not connected” appears, press ENTER to repeat from
step 1 or try another connection method.
iOS 10 (example of English version)
6
Press SETUP.
This completes the network settings.
The name of the unit
175
En
Setting up a wireless connection by selecting from
the list of available access points
2
After searching for access points, the list of available access points
appears on the TV.
You can set up a wireless connection by selecting an access point from the list of
wireless LAN routers (access points) found by the unit. You need to manually enter the
security key.
3
Setup menu
Use the cursor keys to select the desired access point and press
ENTER.
A check mark is put on the desired access point.
“Network” > “Network Connection” > “Wireless(Wi-Fi)”
1
Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Access Point Scan” and press
ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.
The edit screen appears.
5
176
En
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key.
6
Setting up a wireless connection manually
When finished entering the key, use the cursor keys to select
“NEXT” and press ENTER.
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the required information manually.
You need to set up the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for
your network.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
Setup menu
“Network” > “Network Connection” > “Wireless(Wi-Fi)”
1
2
Access Point X
Use the cursor keys to select “Manual Setting” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.
The edit screen appears.
3
7
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to
start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV
screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection
method.
8
Press SETUP.
This completes the network settings.
177
En
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access
point.
4
5
9
When finished entering the key, use the cursor keys to select
“NEXT” and press ENTER.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV
screen.
Use the cursor keys to select the encryption method.
Choices
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered
correctly, and repeat from step 1.
None, WEP, WPA-PSK(AES), Mixed Mode
10
NOTE
If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted.
6
Press SETUP.
This completes the network settings.
Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.
The edit screen appears.
NOTE
If you select “None” in step 5, this item is not available.
7
8
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to
start the connection process.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key.
When finished entering the key, use the cursor keys to select
“NEXT” and press ENTER.
The manual setting screen appears on the TV.
178
En
Setting up a wireless connection by using the WPS
PIN code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless
router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point)
supports the WPS PIN code method.
Setup menu
“Network” > “Network Connection” > “Wireless(Wi-Fi)”
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select “PIN Code” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.
The list of available access points appears on the TV.
3
4
Use the cursor keys to select the desired access point and press
ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
5
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless
router (access point).
6
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to
start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV
screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection
method.
7
Press SETUP.
This completes the network settings.
179
En
Input/output jacks and cables
Video/audio jacks
Video jacks
n HDMI jacks
n COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable.
Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance
blue (Pb), and chrominance red (Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
1
( 1 MOVIE)
2
(5 STB)
HDMI cable
Component video cable
NOTE
▪ Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable as short as possible to
prevent signal quality degradation.
n VIDEO jacks
▪ The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD
video transmission (through output) features.
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
▪ Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with Ethernet to enjoy 3D or 4K
Ultra HD videos.
AV 2
180
En
Video pin cable
Audio jacks
n OPTICAL jack
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. If there is a protective cap
on the tip of the cable, remove it before using the cable.
AUDIO 1
Digital optical cable
(7 TV )
OPTICAL
n COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.
Digital coaxial cable
AUDIO 3
COAXIAL
n AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals.
(Stereo L/R jacks)
Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable).
AUDIO 4
Stereo pin cable
(Stereo mini jack)
Use a stereo mini-plug cable.
Stereo mini-plug cable
AUDIO
181
En
Using presence speakers
Presence speaker layout
The following three layout patterns are available for the presence speakers. Choose a
layout pattern that suits your listening environment.
• Front Height
Installing the presence speakers in Overhead
position
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position (Overhead).
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of
front and rear sound spaces effectively.
• Overhead
• Dolby Enabled SP
NOTE
CAUTION
▪ Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.
▪ You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP 3D with any layout pattern.
▪ When using presence speakers, configure the “Layout” setting in the “Setup” menu before automatically
optimizing the speaker settings (YPAO). For details, see the following:
– “Setting the layout of the presence speakers” (p.112)
Installing the presence speakers in Front Height
position
Install the presence speakers on the front wall (Front Height).
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom
sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively.
NOTE
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening position, or the ceiling
between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position.
182
En
Using Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence
speakers
Use Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.
This utilizes sound reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sound only from
speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.
NOTE
▪ Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers.
▪ A Dolby Enabled speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled speakers.
183
En
Glossary
Glossary of audio information
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to
offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD
can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio)
simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).
n Glossary of audio decoding format
This is a glossary of the technical terms related to audio decoding format used in this
manual.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit
audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and
immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object
based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately
positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback.
A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.
DTS Dialog Control
DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to
help make the dialog more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that
the content creator may disable the use of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may
not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may add more functionality to DTS Dialog
Control or increase the range of the feature.
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital
Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos
stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This
object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback
through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
Dolby Digital
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES.
This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix
6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES
Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded.
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that
supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD disc.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that
supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio
streaming services on the Internet and audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).
Dolby Enabled Speaker
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker
technology employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the
height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and
special signal processing that can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker
module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing an immersive
listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.
Dolby Surround
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a
higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This
technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD
(Blu-ray Disc).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that
supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully
compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This
technology is used for audio on most BD (Blu-ray Disc).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition
home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio
can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio)
simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1
and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is
compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems
that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.
DTS Neo: 6
DTS Neo: 6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides
discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
184
En
DTS:X
WAV
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS.
Unbound from channels, DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich,
realistic and immersive soundscape - in front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more
accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to automatically adapt the audio to the
speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to a home surround
theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at
www.dts.com/dtsx
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data
obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but
you can also use other compression methods.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as
SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 11.2
MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range
of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
FLAC
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With
psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate.
Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of
audio quality.
n Glossary of audio information other than audio
decoding format
This is a glossary of the technical terms related to audio information used in this
manual.
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed
audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies,
this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
MPEG-4 AAC
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio
streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while
maintaining better audio quality than MP3.
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to
120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance
low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency
audio.
Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built
in to DTS:X to provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for
AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can produce up to 11.x channels.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing
caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically
correcting the timing lag between audio and video output.
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted.
This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio
format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs.
Glossary of HDMI and video information
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
This is a glossary of the technical terms related to HDMI and video information used in
this manual.
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog
audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
Component video signal
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the
sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be
played back are wider.
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for
luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully
with this system because each of these signals is independent.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound
level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the
sound level is more accurate.
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are
combined and transmitted with a single cable.
Composite video signal
185
En
Deep Color
Glossary of network information
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of
available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional
color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16
bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to
billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle
gradations between colors.
This is a glossary of the technical terms related to network information used in this
manual.
HDCP
Wi-Fi
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents
copying of digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or
connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the
complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. Only products
that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/
video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals
using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the
HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
SSID
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
Glossary of Yamaha technologies
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color
space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While
remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color
space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.
This is a glossary of the technical terms related to Yamaha technologies used in this
manual.
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since
home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely,
it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually
measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual
experience of a movie theater in your own home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images.
CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so
that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression
music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the
overall sound system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate
representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround
speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the
unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room.
186
En
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Supported devices and file formats
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround
speakers with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit
creates the realistic sound field in a listening room.
Supported Bluetooth® devices
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field
without presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the
3D sound field in your room.
The following Bluetooth devices can be used by the unit.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
• Operation of all Bluetooth devices cannot be guaranteed.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the
surround back speakers with surround speaker. Even if the surround back speakers are not
connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed of CINEMA DSP.
Supported USB devices
YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer)
• Bluetooth devices that support A2DP can be used.
The following USB devices can be used by the unit.
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections,
measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes
the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room.
• This unit is compatible with USB memory devices that are in FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Do not connect any other type of USB devices.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Operation of all USB devices cannot be guaranteed.
Supported AirPlay devices
This AV Receiver is compatible with AirPlay 2. iOS 11.4 or later is required.
187
En
Supported file formats
Video signal flow
The following file formats can be used by the unit.
File
Sampling
frequency
(kHz)
WAV *
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/
176.4/192
Quantization
bit (bit)
16/24/32
Bitrate (kbps)
-
Number of
channels
2
Video device
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
WMA
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
MPEG-4 AAC
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
FLAC
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24
-
2
4
ALAC
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96
16/24
-
2
4
AIFF
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/
176.4/192
2.8 MHz/
5.6 MHz/
11.2 MHz
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as follows.
The unit
HDMI in
16/24/32
1
-
-
2
2
TV
4
MP3
DSD
Video signal flow
Support for
gapless
playback
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
4
Y
-
AV 1
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
PR
* Linear PCM format only. 32 bit-float files cannot be played back.
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO in
• The playable file formats differ depending on the software installed on media
servers (PCs/NAS). Refer to the instruction manual of the server software for details.
VIDEO
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
188
En
VIDEO
HDMI out
HDMI
Video conversion table
Video conversion table is shown as follows.
NOTE
▪ You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video
Mode” in the “Setup” menu. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the use of the video signal processing” (p.128)
▪ The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
HDMI out
Resolution
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p
1080i
1080p
4K
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
720p
m
m
m
m
1080i
m
m
m
m
1080p/50, 60 Hz
m
m
480i/576i
480p/576p
HDMI in
1080p/24 Hz
m
m
m
m
4K
m
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
480i/576i
m
m
m
m
m
m
VIDEO in
480i/576i
m
m
m
m
m
m
m: Available
189
En
Additional information on HDMI
(Example)
HDMI Control and synchronized operations
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit
(such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control
external devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to
the unit with an HDMI cable.
HDMI Control
Turns on and displays video
from the playback device
Playback starts
Press SCENE1
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
NOTE
• Standby
▪ HDMI Control might not work properly.
• Volume control including mute
▪ For details on the scene selection, see the following:
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in
tuner
– “Selecting a registered scene” (p.88)
▪ For details on TV audio input, see the following:
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
– “Setting the audio jack used for TV audio input” (p.129)
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
▪ For details on the functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys, see the following:
– “Setting the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control” (p.146)
(Example)
HDMI Control
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
HDMI Control
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
Playback device also
turns off
NOTE
The unit turns off (standby)
This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
Turn off the TV
1
2
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection
• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
Enable the HDMI Control function on the unit, TV and HDMI
Control-compatible playback devices (such as BD/DVD players).
In order to enable the HDMI Control function on the unit, set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, and then configure the settings in
related items (“TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync” and “ARC”). For details,
see the following:
▪ “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.129)
• Controlling the external device from which video is displayed on the TV (playback
and menu operations)
• Controlling the TV when you select TV audio input that is set in “TV Audio Input” in
the “Setup” menu
• Controlling the TV with the color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) keys of the remote
control when “TV Control” is set for the color keys
3
190
En
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
4
5
6
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
Check that the input, to which the playback device is connected
on the unit, is selected.
NOTE
For details on the HDMI Control settings, see the following:
If not, select the input source manually.
7
8
▪ “HDMI Control and synchronized operations” (p.190)
1
2
Check that the video from the playback device is displayed on the
TV.
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by
turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote
control.
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically
switched to “AUDIO1” and the TV audio will be played back on the
unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
NOTE
▪ If HDMI Control does not work properly, the problem may be solved by turning the playback device off and
on again, or by unplugging the power plug and plugging it in again. Also, HDMI Control may not work
properly if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on
devices not in use.
• “ARC” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the use of ARC” (p.129)
• The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked
“ARC”) on the TV.
▪ If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting
on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the
instruction manual for the TV.
▪ We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
NOTE
▪ If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical
cable to input TV audio to the unit. For details, see the following:
– “Setting the use of ARC” (p.129)
– “OPTICAL jack” (p.181)
▪ When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
▪ “AUDIO1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO
1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the
SCENE function, you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (7). For details, see the
following:
– “Setting the audio jack used for TV audio input” (p.129)
– “Registering a scene” (p.90)
191
En
HDMI signal compatibility
Confirm the following HDMI signal used by the unit.
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may
not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For
details, refer to the instruction manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the playback device
appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does
not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the
instruction manual for the playback device.
• If the playback device can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio
commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio commentaries
mixed down by using digital audio input (OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks). For details,
refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. The unit is not compatible
with audio commentaries for BD, such as audio content downloaded from the
internet.
192
En
Trademarks
Trademarks
The trademarks used in this manual are as follows.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media
Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Google Noto Fonts
Android™
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby
Atmos, Dolby Surround, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high
environmental performance.
This product uses the following fonts.
Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Copyright © June 2015, Google
(https://www.google.com/get/noto/#sans-lgc), with Reserved Font
Name Noto Sans Version 1.004.
Copyright © June 2015, Google
(https://www.google.com/get/noto/help/cjk/), with Reserved Font
Name Noto Sans CJK Version 1.004.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under
license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with
the Symbol, DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks
or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
This AV Receiver is compatible with AirPlay 2. iOS 11.4 or later is
required.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has
been designed to work specifically with the technology identified in
the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
Apple, AirPlay, Apple TV, Apple Watch, iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro,
iPhone, Lightning, and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are
certification marks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, Wi-Fi Protected Setup and WPA2 are
registered trademarks or trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Yamaha Corporation is under license.
The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
This license is available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/
LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL
license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
Licenses
For information on the licenses of the third-party software in this
product, refer to the following.
(For U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models)
http://(IP address of this product*)/licenses.html
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
* IP address of this product is checked with MusicCast
CONTROLLER.
App StoreSM
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version1.1.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha
Corporation.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
193
En
Specifications
Other jacks
Specifications
•
•
•
•
The specifications of this unit are as follows.
Input jacks
HDMI
Analog Audio
• Audio x 5 (including PHONO, AUX)
HDMI Features:
• 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60, 50Hz 10/12bit), 3D Video, ARC (Audio Return Channel), HDMI
Control (CEC), Auto Lip Sync, Deep Color, “x.v.Color”, HD audio playback, Selectable HDMI
input in HDMI standby mode, 21:9 Aspect Ratio, BT.2020 Colorimetry, HDR Compatible
Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
• Optical x 2
• Coaxial x 2
Video Format (Repeater Mode)
• VGA
• 480i/60 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 4K/60Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
Video
• Component x 1
• Composite x 1
HDMI Input
• HDMI x 5
Other jacks
• USB x 1 (USB2.0)
• NETWORK (Wired) x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
Analog Audio
• Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R*1, EXTRA SP 2
L/R*2)
*1
YPAO MIC x 1
REMOTE IN x 1
REMOTE OUT x 1
TRIGGER OUT x 1
Note: Assignment is possible [F.PRESENCE, ZONE2]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK, ZONE2, BI-AMP]
• Pre Out x 2 (FRONT L/R)
• Subwoofer Out x 2 (mono x 2)
• ZONE2 OUT x 2 (L/R)
• Headphone x 1
HDMI Output
• HDMI OUT x 2
Audio Format
• Dolby Atmos
• Dolby TrueHD
• Dolby Digital Plus
• Dolby Digital
• DTS:X
• DTS-HD Master Audio
• DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
• DTS Express
• DTS
• DSD 2-ch to 6-ch (2.8 MHz)
• PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
Content Protection: HDCP 2.2/2.3 compatible
Link Function: CEC supported
194
En
TUNER
Internet Radio
Analog Tuner
• [U.K., Europe and Russia models]
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
• [Australia model]
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
• [Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
Wi-Fi function
• Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
• Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection
• Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode, None
• Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac*
* 20 MHz channel bandwidth only
Compatible Decoding Formats
USB
Decoding Format
• Dolby Atmos
• Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
• Dolby Digital
• DTS:X
• DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express
• DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory
Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A
Bluetooth
Sink Function
• Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Supported profile
– A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported codec
– SBC, AAC
Post Decoding Format
• Dolby Surround
• DTS Neo: 6 Music, DTS Neo: 6 Cinema
• Neural:X
Audio Section
Source Function
• AVR to Sink Device (ex. Bluetooth Headphone)
• Supported profile
– A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported codec
– SBC
Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
• [All models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
– Front L/R
95 W+95 W
• [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
– Front L/R
Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
– Center
Bluetooth version
• Ver. 4.2
Wireless output
• Bluetooth Class 2
110 W+110 W
110 W
– Surround L/R
110 W+110 W
– Surround Back L/R
110 W+110 W
Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
• [All models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
– Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R
Maximum communication distance
• 10 m (33 ft) without interference
130 W/ch
• [U.K., Europe and Russia models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
– Front L/R
Network
PC Client Function
AirPlay supported
195
En
160 W/ch
Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
– Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R
160 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
– Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R
160 W/ch
• PHONO (Input Shorted 35 mV, Front Speaker Out)
96 dB or more
• AV 2 etc. (Pure Direct) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)
110 dB or more
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
• Front L/R (Speaker Out)
150 μV or less
Dynamic Power (IHF)
• Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)
130/170/195/240 W
Damping Factor
• Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω
Channel Separation
• PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
60 dB/55 dB or more
• AV 2 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
70 dB/50 dB or more
100 or more
Volume Control
Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
• PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)
3.5 mV/47 kΩ
• AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)
200 mV/47 kΩ
• Main Zone
MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Zone2
MUTE, -80 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Tone Control Characteristics
Maximum Input Signal
• PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD)
• AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On)
• Bass Boost/Cut
60 mV
2.3 V
• Bass Turnover
• Treble Boost/Cut
• Treble Turnover
Output Level / Output Impedance
• PRE OUT
±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
350 Hz
±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
3.5 kHz
Filter Characteristics
– Front L/R
1 V/2.7 kΩ
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
• SUBWOOFER
1 V/1.2 kΩ
• H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back)
12 dB/oct.
• L.P.F. (Subwoofer)
24 dB/oct.
• ZONE2 OUT
470 mV/1.7 kΩ
Maximum Output Level
• PRE OUT
1.6 V
Video Section
Video Signal Type
Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
• AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω)
NTSC/PAL/SECAM
100 mV/560 Ω
Video Signal Level
Frequency Response
• AV 2 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz)
• Composite
+0/-3 dB
–Y
RIAA Equalization Deviation
• PHONO
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Component
– Pb/Pr
0±0.5 dB
1 Vp-p/75 Ω
0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
Video Maximum Input Level
Total Harmonic Distortion
• PHONO to Front (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 10 V)
0.02% or less
• AV 2 etc. to Front (Pure Direct) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)
0.06% or less
196
1.5 Vp-p or more
En
FM Section
General
Tuning Range
• [U.S.A. and Canada models]
• [Asia, and Central and South America
models]
Power Supply
87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
• [U.S.A. and Canada models]
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
• [Central and South America model]
AC110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• [China model]
AC 220 V, 50 Hz
• [U.K. and Europe models]
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• [Australia model]
AC 240 V, 50 Hz
• [Other models]
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• [U.K., Europe and Russia models]
50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
• Monaural
3 μV (20.8 dBf)
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
• Monaural
69 dB
• Stereo
67 dB
• Monaural
0.5%
• Stereo
0.6%
Antenna Input
75  unbalanced
Power Consumption
• [U.S.A. and Canada models]
400 W
• [U.K., Europe, Russia, Australia and China models]
300 W
• [Asia, and Central and South America models]
270 W
• HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off
0.1 W
• HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)
0.8 W
• HDMI Control On, Standby Through Auto (HDMI no signal and no CEC for
8 hours)
0.4 W
• Network Standby On
AM Section (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models)
Tuning Range
• [U.S.A. and Canada models]
• [China model]
AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Standby Power Consumption
Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
• [Asia, and Central and South America models]
AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• [Asia model]
– Wired
1.3 W
– Wireless (Wi-Fi)
1.4 W
– Bluetooth
1.4 W
• HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby On
530 kHz to 1710 kHz
– Wireless (Wi-Fi)
2.0 W
530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
531 kHz to 1611 kHz
Maximum Power Consumption
• [Asia, and Central and South America models]
DAB Section (U.K., Europe, Russia and Australia models)
590 W
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Tuning Range
435 x 171 x 380 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 15”)
174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)
Reference Dimensions (with wireless antenna upright)
Support Audio Format
* Including legs and protrusions
MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2
Antenna
435 x 248 x 380 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 15”)
Weight
75 Ω unbalanced
11.0 kg (23.4 lbs)
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain
the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file.
197
En
Default settings
Default settings of the Option
menu
Video Processing
YPAO Result
Off
Treble, Bass
Bypass (0.0 dB)
YPAO Volume
• YPAO Volume
Off
• Adaptive DRC
Off
• Result
-
Sound
Shuffle / Repeat
* When both “Treble” and “Bass” are
0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.
• Shuffle
Off
• Repeat
Off
FM Mode
Stereo
Default settings of the Setup
menu
Information
-
Lipsync
• Delay Enable
Enable
• Auto/Manual Select
Auto
• Adjustment
0 ms
DSP Parameter
-
The default settings of the “Setup” menu are as follows.
Dialogue
• Dialogue Level
0
• DTS Dialogue Control
0
• Dialogue Lift
0
(This setting is available only when
one of the sound programs (except
for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is
selected when presence speakers
are used, or Virtual Presence
Speaker (VPS) is working.)
Lipsync
0 ms
Surround Decoder
Speaker
• Decode Type
Power Amp Assign
Basic
Configuration
• Front
Small
• Center
Small
• Surround
Small
– Layout
Rear
• Surround Back
Small
• Front Presence
Enhancer
Small
– Layout
– TUNER, (network sources), AirPlay,
SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB
On
• Crossover
– Others
Off
• Subwoofer
Front Height
80 Hz
Use
– Phase
Normal
Volume Trim
• Input Trim
0.0 dB
• Subwoofer Trim
0.0 dB
Extra Bass
Off
Direct
Video Out
The default settings of the “Option” menu are as
follows.
Tone Control
Test Tone
• Video Mode
Off
Distance
3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Level
0.0 dB
Parametric EQ
Through
198
En
Auto
• Center Spread
Off
• Center Image
0.3
7ch Stereo
• Level
0
• Front / Rear Balance
0
• Left / Right Balance
0
• Height Balance
5
• Monaural Mix
Off
Dynamic Range
Maximum
Volume
• Max Volume
+16.5 dB
• Initial Volume
Off
Adaptive DSP Level
On
Virtual Speaker
• VSBS
On
Scene
Scene Setting
-
Scene Rename
-
Video/HDMI
Information
• Resolution
• Aspect
-
Direct
• TV Audio Input
• ARC
• Standby Sync
Limited
Network Name
Off
Bluetooth
• Disconnect
On
On
• HDMI OUT2
Off
Auto
Information
Network Connection
• Transmitter
Off
• Device Search
Wired
Information
-
Network Standby
Variable
• Max Volume
+10.0 dB
Off
• Audio Delay
0 ms
DSP Skip
• Tone Control
• Color Key
Off
Assign1
Default
Display Set
• Dimmer (Front Display)
On
• Short Message
Auto
• Extra Bass
• PROGRAM Key
• Volume
• Wallpaper
0
dB
On
Piano
Off
• Left / Right Balance
0
Trigger Output
• Trigger Mode
• Target Zone
• Main Zone
-
• Zone2
-
Power
All
ECO
• Auto Power Standby
Auto
MAC Address Filter
On
(Default setting may be different depending
on the input source.)
Off
Party Mode Set
• Filter
Auto Play
Remote Key
Zone2
Zone Rename
On
Auto
Manual
(For AV 2, AUX, AUDIO 4-5, PHONO,
TUNER, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET
RADIO, Bluetooth, USB only “Manual” can
be selected.)
-
• Enhancer
IP Address
• DHCP
Input Rename
Audio Send
• Monaural
Network
Off
-
• Initial Volume
Off
-
On
• Volume
HDCP Version
English
Audio In
Multi Zone
Off
HDMI Standby Through
Language
Auto
• HDMI OUT1
-
• Others
• Bluetooth Standby
Off
Information
• HDMI 1-5
Through
AUDIO1
System
Input Skip
Bluetooth
Audio Receive
HDMI Audio Output
• HDMI 1-5
AirPlay Volume Interlock
Auto
HDMI Control
• HDMI Control
Enable
MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Video Mode
• Video Mode
DMC Control
– U.K., Europe and Russia models
• Target : Zone2
Enable
Off
– Other models
• ECO Mode
199
En
20 minutes
Off
Off
Memory Guard
Off
Firmware Update
-
Default settings of the
ADVANCED SETUP menu
The default settings of the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
are as follows.
SP IMP.
REMOTE ID
TU
(Asia model only)
8 Ω MIN
ID1
FM50/AM9
TV FORMAT
• U.S.A. and Canada models
NTSC
• Other models
PAL
MON.CHK
YES
4K MODE
MODE 1
DTS MODE
MODE 1
BKUP/RSTR
INIT
UPDATE
VERSION
BKUP
CANCEL
USB
-
200
En
Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Manual Development Group
© 2018 Yamaha Corporation
Published 07/2019 NV-D0
AV17-0350
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising